SmithSystemEducation.. - Keller Office

NEW FOR 2010
The inspiration behind the new products in this year’s catalog is changing curricula and
classrooms. Beyond their up-to-date designs, these new products offer new and increased
functionalities that can greatly enhance student and educators’ performance.
FLAVORS SEATING
The demands of the offers just the right
active classroom are amount of flex to
what shaped the allow the student
new Flavors Chair. to move and adjust
Because students their posture; this
today don’t always promotes better
face the front, the concentration
Flavors Chair was compared to a
designed to offer rigid seat back,
comfortable seating according to
to the student
contemporary
facing back or front, research.
left or right.
See pgs. 26–31.
Similarly, its back
2

CASCADE STORAGE
A comprehensive subjects are being
storage solution, it is taught without textbooks
and workbooks,
designed to house the
profusion of threedimensional
items focused on a single
but with packets
now used in teaching unit of learning – these
as a way to engage materials also need to
more of the student’s be organized, stored
senses in the learning and distributed. See
process. Additionally, pgs. 186-201.
more and more
INTERCHANGE DESK
The Interchange line or in traditional
stands for innovation classrooms. If an
and the new
expansive workspace
Interchange Open is needed, choose
Front Desks fit right the Interchange
in. The Interchange Open Front Desk
Wing and Diamond or Interchange
Open Front Desks Two-Student Open
can be used for Front Desk.
collaborative learning See pgs. 68-87.
PRESENTATION
LECTERNS
Smith System is
introducing a new
line of Presentation
Lecterns. They offer
ample lockable
storage for projectors
or visual aids; great
mobility so they can
be moved around
the classroom; and a
large, stable surface
to hold lesson notes.
See pgs. 108-109.
3

Thank you for considering a product from
Smith System. Today, our portfolio has
expanded far beyond K through 12
classroom furniture, reflecting the
contemporary needs of educators and
students from pre-K through adult. Our
goal with this catalog is to present the
information you need in the most usable
way possible. We’ve divided our portfolio
by product categories, and within those
categories, by individual product lines.
While this is bound to make finding
individual products easier, the risk is that
you might not realize that Smith System
products are designed to work in concert
with each other as well as individually.
This ability to create a unified design
scheme throughout an entire building or
campus with furniture and accessories that
complement each other is an important
benefit of choosing a suite of products
from Smith System. Today you can choose
from our full suites of:
• Pre-K classroom furniture
• K – 12 classroom furniture, accessories
and storage
• Secondary and post-secondary furniture
• Library furniture and booktrucks
• Computer and Distance Learning labs
So, whether you’re looking for anything
ranging from a student desk to a complete
solution for an educational facility, this
catalog is meant to be a helpful resource
for you.
4

CONTENTS
New for 2010......................................................... 2-3
Table of Contents..................................................4-7
DesignU................................................................. 8-9
Smarter Furniture..............................................10-11
Seating Overview.............................................. 12-13
Desking Overview.............................................. 14-15
Tables Overview................................................ 16-17
Storage Overview.............................................. 18-19
Early Childhood Overview............................... 20-21
Library Overview...............................................22-23
SEATING
Seating Furniture Intro...................................24-25
Flavors Seating................................................26-27
Flavors Combo Desk...................................... 28-29
Flavors Adjustable Chair................................ 30-31
Intuit Chair........................................................32-33
Intuit Sled Base Chair.....................................34-35
UXL Stack Chair............................................... 36-37
UXL Mobile Chair............................................38-39
UXL Tablet Arm Chair..................................... 40-41
UXL Beam Seating..........................................42-43
UXL Nest & Fold Chair.................................. 44-45
Brilliant Chair...................................................46-47
Astute Chair..................................................... 48-49
Viking Chair...................................................... 50-51
Husky Chair......................................................52-53
Circusline Chair.............................................. 54-55
DESKS & TABLES
Desk & Table Intro...........................................56-57
Elemental Desk.............................................. 58-59
Silhouette Desk...............................................60-61
Quick Carrel.....................................................62-63
Activity Table................................................... 64-65
Husky Table......................................................66-67
INTERCHANGE
The following, in word, stylized and design forms, are
Interchange Furniture Intro.......................... 68-69
trademarks of Smith System Manufacturing Company:
3-2-1 Desk, Access, Acrobat, Anything Truck, Arc, Astute,
Interchange DesignU.......................................70-71
Boardroom, Brilliant, Cascade, Circusline, Elemental,
Open Front Rectangle Desk................................ 72
Everything Cart, Flavors, Flex, the Flexline line of
Open Front Diamond Desk.................................. 73
products (including Flexline Corner, Flexline Wave,
Flexline Leonardo!, Flexline Circle Centers, and Flexline
Open Front Wing Desk......................................... 74
Trap), Furniture for Inspired Learning, Furniture for
Wing Desk...............................................................75
Student Success, Gorilla Truck, Huddle, Husky,
Diamond Desk..................................................76-77
Interchange, Interchange Diamond, Interchange Open
Front Wing, Intuit, Nomad, Planner, Quick Carrel,
3-2-1 Desk......................................................... 78-79
Silhouette, Smith System Tech Lab, Smith System, the
Boardroom....................................................... 80-81
Smith System “Swirl” Logo, UXL, Viking and Works.
Interchange Activity Table..............................82-83
Perspex® is a registered trademark of Lucite
International, a wholly owned subsidiary of
Interchange Art & Science Table.................. 84-85
Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Accessories......................................................86-87
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
5

PLANNER FURNITURE
Planner Furniture Intro..............................88-89
Planner DesignU.........................................90-91
Single-Student Desk................................. 92-93
Two and Three-Student Desks.................94-95
Huddle Desk............................................... 96-97
Planner Student Office.............................98-99
Planner Activity Table.............................100-102
Café Tables.......................................................103
Planner Teacher Desk.............................104-105
Vertical Files & Wardrobe Cabinet............... 106
Bookcases........................................................107
Lecterns....................................................108-109
Access Station........................................... 110-111
Planner Lab................................................112-113
Planner Work Centers.............................. 114-115
Planner Science Table.................................... 116
Art Table............................................................117
Graphic Arts.............................................. 118-119
Accessories..............................................120-123
Planner Leg Options...................................... 122
FLEXLINE FURNITURE
Flexline Furniture Intro..........................124-125
Flexline DesignU..................................... 126-127
Single-Student Desk..............................128-129
Two-Student Desk....................................130-131
Arc Desk.................................................... 132-133
DesignU Arc............................................. 134-135
Flex Station.............................................. 136-137
Leonardo!................................................. 138-139
Flexline Work Center...............................140-141
ADA Works Desk...................................... 142-143
Accessories..............................................144-145
UXL FURNITURE
UXL Furniture Intro............................. 146-147
UXL Open Front Desk........................148-149
UXL Student Desk................................150-151
UXL Diamond Desk............................. 152-153
UXL Table.............................................154-155
UXL Computer Station....................... 156-157
UXL Table Vignettes...........................158-159
UXL Table Accessories........................160-161
UXL Nest & Fold Table....................... 162-163
UXL Leg Appendix..............................164-165
ACROBAT FURNITURE
Acrobat Furniture Intro....................... 166-167
Acrobat DesignU.................................168-169
Acrobat Student Desk.......................... 170-171
Acrobat Teacher Desk..........................172-173
Acrobat Teacher Desk/Lecterns.........174-175
Acrobat Vignettes.................................176-177
Acrobat Computer Station..................178-179
Acrobat Workstation.............................180-181
Acrobat Accessories....................182, 184-185
Laptop Cart...................................................183
6

CONTENTS CONT’D
CASCADE STORAGE SYSTEM
Cascade Storage System Intro...................186-187
Cascade Storage Overview.........................188-189
Case Shelf Storage...................................... 190-191
Cabinet Shelf Storage.................................192-193
Tower Shelf Storage....................................194-195
Case Tote Tray Storage................................196-197
Cabinet Tote Tray Storage...........................198-199
Tower Tote Tray Storage.............................200-201
EARLY CHILDHOOD FURNITURE
Early Childhood Furniture Intro............... 202-203
Husky Tables & Chairs...............................204-205
3-2-1 Desk.................................................... 206-207
Circusline Table & Chairs...........................208-209
Brilliant Chair................................................ 210-211
Everything Cart & Big Book Truck..............212-213
LIBRARY FURNITURE
Library Furniture Intro........................ 224-225
Library DesignU....................................226-227
Circulation Station.............................. 228-229
Carrels.................................................... 230-231
Reference Kiosk...................................232-233
Reading Tables.................................... 234-235
Library Seating.....................................236-237
Library Shelving Guide........................238-239
Single-Face Shelving.......................... 240-241
Double-Face Shelving.........................242-243
Custom Shelving..................................244-245
Display Stands......................................246-247
Nomads.................................................248-249
Top & Edge Choices.............................250-251
Color Chart........................................... 252-255
Terms & Conditions......................................256
BOOKTRUCKS
Booktruck Intro............................................ 214-215
Slope Shelf Booktruck................................216-217
Flat Shelf Booktruck................................... 218-219
Everything Cart & Anything Truck.............220-221
Gorilla Truck................................................222-223
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
7

DESIGNU
The new generation schoolroom
design tool created for you.
DesignU came
about to answer the
two questions that
dominate the minds
of educational
furniture buyers.
How will the
furniture look and
how will it perform
in my schoolroom?
DesignU answers
both questions by
helping buyers
visualize a detailed,
perfectly
proportioned
classroom in just
minutes without
pencils, rulers or
graph paper.
Unlike existing
design software,
DesignU is easy to
use and the designs
are easy to share.
With DesignU, even
a beginner can
design a classroom
in minutes. And
when you’re
finished, DesignU
automatically
generates a
complete list of the
products in the room.
What can DesignU do for you?
It can help you to:
1. Design a classroom, library or computer lab using Smith System furniture.
2. Arrange and re-arrange the furniture to create different floor plans.
Add or delete products, as desired.
3. View the room in a 3D simulation.
4. Create a list of all the furniture items and accessories
used to create the room.
5. Contact decision makers and your dealer with the room design.
To get started, visit
www.smithsystem.
com. DesignU is a
menu option on the
left side of the
screen. Open it for
preconfigured
classrooms and a
room you can
design from scratch.
See how easy it
is to create
inspired learning
environments with
Smith System
furniture.
8

smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061 9

Because schools need smarter furniture
After 104 years in business, we wouldn’t
trade any time in our history for the
present. That’s because the field of
education has never seen so much
change, excitement and innovation as
today.
As educators know, Smith System
is always at the forefront of innovation
in educational furniture. Our first step in
keeping abreast of educators’ needs is
to closely monitor currents in education.
Next, we use all our experience,
foresight and imagination to create
furniture and accessories that help
educators meet their ever-changing
challenges. Finally we manufacture the
furniture to the highest standards of
quality and environmental responsibility,
then deliver it on time.
While not complicated, this
formula has served us well throughout
our history. From the 1950s and our
first line of student desks, through the
1970s and our breakthrough computer
furniture, through the 1990s and our
acclaimed collaborative learning
furniture, to the present and the
broadest selection of educational
furniture we’ve ever offered – so broad
that we offer a turnkey educational
environment for every curriculum and
grade level from pre-K through college.
We can also offer our commitment
to make these environments as healthy
as possible. Our entire portfolio of
classroom, library and computer
furniture has received GREENGUARD
for Children and Schools certification,
demonstrating a contribution to
cleaner indoor air quality. To achieve
certification, each material type used
in our products undergoes rigorous
testing. In the future, each new or
enhanced product must undergo the
same process, and our entire line must
be re-certified annually.
Like the constant attention we give
to our products, our processes receive
thorough scrutiny with the focus on
efficiency – we won’t rest until we’ve
statistically eliminated all of our waste,
whether it’s in handling products in our
facility or in unused materials used in
manufacturing and shipping.
So put Smith System to the test:
Make your selections from the following
pages, place an order, and give us the
chance to perform for you.
11

SEATING OVERVIEW
A FULL SPECTRUM OF SEATING OPTIONS
For 2010, Smith System offers eight distinct lines of seating, including our new Flavors line. Each of those
eight lines offers even more choices: colors, finishes, accessories and other variations. Which is right for your
students, school and educators? It’s an easy decision if you start with the following insights.
INTUIT CHAIR
The inviting, contemporary
and comfortable Intuit Chair,
with distinctive shape and
iconic grip is winning over
more and more schools.
Scaled to accommodate
students from K through
Adult with three shell sizes
to choose from: A+, A and B.
More photos and
information plus color
options on pgs. 32-35.
FLAVORS CHAIR
Its biggest design
influences are the needs
presented by an active
classroom. Students
are encouraged to
move and to work with
classmates on either side
and behind. Accordingly,
the Flavors Chair is
designed to be a true
360˚ chair. The chair
has a bit of flex, shown
by scientific studies
to help the student
focus on information
being presented.
More photos and
information plus color
options on pg. 26.
12 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL CHAIR
An immediate success
in secondary and postsecondary
institutions,
this chair offers so many
options, it’s like custom
seating. It’s part of our
comprehensive UXL line
of furniture. More photos
and information plus
color options on pg. 36.
INTUIT CHAIR
The inviting,
contemporary and
comfortable Intuit Chair,
with distinctive shape
and iconic grip is
winning over more and
more schools. Scaled to
accommodate students
from pre-K through
Adult. More photos and
information plus color
options on pg. 33.
BRILLIANT CHAIR
A perennial favorite
because it’s proven to do
many things well: help
students maintain their
focus, provide a long
service life and offer
easy moving and
stacking. More photos
and information plus
color options on pg. 46.
ASTUTE CHAIR
It passes what may be
the school’s most
important test: the test
of time. Its durability and
value are legendary. Its
design encourages good
posture and attention for
the student. More photos
and information plus color
options on pg. 48.
VIKING CHAIR
This classically designed
hard-plastic stacking
chair offers educators
the triple benefit of
durability, easy care and
easy storage. It also
offers a number of
options of colors and
finishes. More photos
and information plus
color options on pg. 50.
HUSKY CHAIR
This design proved to be
so popular, we couldn’t
confine it to pre-K classrooms.
Husky Chairs,
with the colorful plastic
glides, are scaled to
students up to grade 12.
More photos and
information plus color
options on pg. 52.
CIRCUSLINE CHAIR
Whether vibrant or
subdued, the matching
colors of shells and legs
allow Circusline Chairs
to transmit energy to
the classroom.
Ergonomic, practical,
durable and scalable for
pre-K through grade 12
students. More photos
and information plus
color options on pg. 54.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
13

DESKING OVERVIEW
DESKING OPTIONS AS VARIED AS CLASSROOMS
Optimizing a classroom environment begins with matching the student desks to the curriculum and space.
To make your task simpler, Smith System offers a line of desks that complements curricula and design schemes
of all kinds. Pair it with Smith System seating to create a unified whole.
Smith System offers seven lines of student desks, each with a number of variations.
INTERCHANGE OPEN FRONT DESK
The Interchange line brings innovation to open front desks with four new styles. Two styles, the Interchange Wing
Open Front Desk and Interchange Diamond Open Front Desk, can be used for collaborative learning or in traditional
classrooms. If an expansive workspace is needed, choose either the Interchange Open Front Desk or the Interchange
Two-Student Open Front Desk. More photos and information plus color and finish options on pg. 72.
14 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

PLANNER DESKS
For strength and stability, this is your top choice
in classrooms of all kinds and computer labs.
More photos and information plus color and finish
options on pg. 93.
UXL DESKS
They allow customization not possible with other
lines and achieve design unity with UXL Chairs.
More photos and information plus color and finish
options on pg. 148.
FLEXLINE DESKS
In today’s active classrooms, ergonomics matter.
Flexline Desks make ingress and egress easy with
unique “Y” legs. More photos and information
plus color and finish options on pg. 128.
ACROBAT DESKS
For great accessibility and maximum strength,
choose Acrobat. The cantilever construction
provides great strength while optimizing student
ingress/egress. More photos and information plus
color and finish options on pg. 170.
ELEMENTAL DESKS
No line of desks at any price offers more flexibility
in choosing and combining colors and finishes. The
line has another exclusive feature: Smith System
durability. More photos and information plus color
and finish options on pg. 58.
SILHOUETTE DESKS
A timeless design for traditional classrooms,
with ample work space, stability and easy access,
in and out, for students. More photos and
information plus color and finish options on pg. 60.
15

TABLES OVERVIEW
TABLES OPTIMIZED FOR UTILITY, SPACE AND STYLE
Smith System makes tables for all purposes, including special uses like science labs and drawing/graphic arts, which
allows the designer to choose all tables from a single source, which, in turn, makes matching colors and finishes easy.
Which line of tables is best? Some criteria can make the decision simple. For instance, if a line of desking has been
selected, selecting tables from the same line contributes to design unity throughout the school. Another way of
deciding is to determine which table best fits the needs of the school. Each line of Smith System tables offers its
own stand-out strengths in the areas of appearance and functionality. All lines offer durability and value.
UXL TABLES
It’s only fitting that these UXL Tables are shown
working together to create a boardroom table.
The reason being, the UXL line is a fully
integrated line of furniture, including seating,
desks and tables. The other key characteristic
of the line is, through a wide array of colors,
finishes, leg sets and accessories, UXL tables
are customizable to fit most any need within
the school, from classroom to commons area.
More photos and information plus color and
finish options on pg. 154.
COMPUTER TABLES
Smith System offers an extensive array of
tables for computer labs. Choices come from
our UXL, Access, Planner, Flexline and
Acrobat lines. All of these choices allow
the designer to extend design unity to the
computer lab, and to choose the lab furniture
best suited for group and/or individual
learning situations. Regardless of the Smith
System line chosen, it is influenced by our
30+ years of computer lab experience.
16 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

ACTIVITY TABLES
The nine shapes – from basic rounds and rectangles
to clovers and horseshoes – in this line were inspired
by actual needs of teachers and students in the
classroom. More photos and information plus color
and finish options on pg. 64.
LIBRARY TABLES
They both support heavy library materials and
complement the look of the shelving, seating and
circulation furniture. More photos and information
plus color and finish options on pg. 234.
INTERCHANGE TABLES
Their distinctive leg sets (free of braces that can
pinch fingers) allow these tables to complement
Interchange Desks. More photos and information
plus color and finish options on pg. 82.
PLANNER TABLES
Combine strength and stability in a table and the
result is versatility. This table can be used in a host
of applications. More photos and information plus
color and finish options on pg. 116.
GRAPHIC ARTS TABLES
Whether in a drafting or graphic design class, the
student can work comfortably and productively at
these tables. More photos and information plus
color and finish options on pg. 118.
UXL NEST & FOLD TABLES
These tables never stop working. They provide stable
platforms while in use, move easily and use scant
space when stored. More photos and information
plus color and finish options on pg. 162.
17

STORAGE OVERVIEW
COMPREHENSIVE ORGANIZATION AND STORAGE SOLUTION
Every day, elementary educators use more and more three-dimensional teaching aids and “manipulatives” in the
classroom. Curricula based on project packets rather than text and workbooks are also gaining greater and greater
acceptance. Both of these trends pose an unmet challenge to educators: How are you going to keep everything
organized? We confidently recommend the Cascade Storage system.
CASCADE TOWER WARDROBE
While offering great capacity, the Cascade Tower Wardrobe offers great
flexibility. The rail system can be changed to accommodate totes of
varying heights. Or, the rails can be left empty to allow storage of tall
objects. More photos and information plus color options on pg. 194.
18 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE MID CASE
Proportioned to do many things well, the
Cascade Mid Cabinet can be ordered with shelves
or adjustable rails. More photos and information
plus color and finish options on pg. 192.
CASCADE MID CABINET & MINI CASE
In addition to nine sizes, Cascade storage offers
choices like lockable doors, colored side panels
and casters. More photos and information plus
color and finish options on pg. 190.
CASCADE MEGA CABINET
Use it in countless ways in the classroom and
beyond. More photos and information plus color
and finish options on pg. 192.
CASCADE TOTES
A Cascade Tote can go from storage container to
bookbox when the desk is fitted with the Cascade
rail system. More photos and information plus
color and finish options on pg. 196.
CASCADE MEGA TOWER
Designed for maximum Tote Tray storage capacity.
More photos and information plus color and finish
options on pg. 194.
CASCADE MINI CASE
A host of options extend the line’s functionality.
More photos and information plus color and finish
options on pg. 191.
19

EARLY CHILDHOOD OVERVIEW
FOR A STIMULATING EARLY CHILDHOOD ENVIRONMENT
Younger minds need special environments for learning. Engaging these young minds requires a wide variety of
furnishings, all offered by Smith System. From seating that’s scaled down to the dimensions of pre-K students
to an ingenious new storage system that simplifies the storage and management of learning aids, to all of the
complementary desks and tables, Smith System offers a comprehensive suite of furnishings for pre-K classrooms.
HUSKY SEATING AND TABLES
Kids seem to have a natural attraction to
the Husky line. Maybe that comes from
the proportions of the seating, perfect for
pre-K students. The big, shiny legs that
form easy hand grips and the colorful
shells and glides have to be considered
also. Likewise, Husky tables are made with
special consideration for young learners.
The Flower tabletop shown in the photo,
for instance, gives each pre-K student a
defined place, which helps the student
concentrate by making him or her feel
more comfortable. More photos and
information plus color options on pg. 204.
20 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE STORAGE
The younger the students, the more teaching aids are used to engage their young minds. The
volume and variety of all the materials being used in Pre-K classes can quickly overwhelm
casual attempts at storage and organization. That need is what drove the development of
Smith System Cascade Storage. More photos and information plus color and finish options
on pg. 190.
ACTIVITY TABLES AND CIRCUSLINE CHAIRS
Choosing Smith System seating and tables allows the designer to match colors and the shapes
of leg sets, enabling a more highly unified design. In addition to assuring design unity,
choosing Smith System furniture assures durability and easy care. More photos and
information plus color and finish options on pg. 208.
21

LIBRARY OVERVIEW
Everything for an integrated library environment.
Libraries offer designers many challenges when it comes to creating a unified design scheme. Matching finishes, colors
and textures among the many furnishings needed to outfit a library can be difficult, and matching those elements with
furnishings throughout the school can be even more difficult. That is, unless they start (and finish) with Smith System’s
comprehensive line of library furniture. It assures everything matches, inside the library and out.
CIRCULATION DESKS
Designed for maximum design flexibility, our circulation desks are created
expressly for the needs of elementary school libraries and their patrons.
The simple accommodation of lowering the height of the circulation desks
makes the library experience less intimidating, and more satisfying, for
the youngest readers. The finishes and colors of Smith System Circulation
Desks are also found in our shelving, seating, tables and kiosks. More
photos and information plus color and finish options on pg. 228.
22 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

LIBRARY SEATING
Available in finishes that complement Smith
System Library Shelving, Carrels, Kiosks,
Desks and Tables. More information on pg. 236.
LIBRARY TABLES
It stands up to heavy reading, literally. At the same
time, the finishes and colors match the other
furnishings. More information on pg. 234.
CARRELS
Our Carrels promote focused study and
complement Smith System library shelving,
tables and desks. More information on pg. 230.
MOBILE DISPLAY
Moveable library shelving that offers the storage,
display and transportation for books and media.
More information on pg. 248.
SHELVING
Our modular shelving gives the designer unmatched
flexibility. Again, finishes, colors and edge trim can
all be coordinated. More information on pg. 238.
BOOKTRUCKS
Our booktrucks can handle books, media and
manipulative materials of all sizes and shapes.
More information and color choices on pg. 220.
UXL TABLES
The UXL Series complements libraries with large
format tables and comfortable seating. Check out
the UXL Series on pgs. 36-45 and 146-163.
BEAM SEATING
Popular for being space efficient and easy to
care for. More information on pg. 42.
23

A choice that fits every student, curriculum and
budget.
A student chair has more to balance than its
four legs on the floor. It has to meet needs as
practical as providing a stable, appropriate place
for the student to sit, as abstract as supporting a
curriculum, and as subjective as creating a
harmonious learning environment.
To meet these demands, our seating lines
span the spectrum of design, accommodating
students throughout their physical and academic
development. Whether it’s from the 40-lb.
kindergartener in an active classroom to the
250-lb. senior in the focused-study environment
of high school.
Our seating lines also provide a range of
aesthetic choices, with a dizzying array of colors
and finishes available.
They’re also created with a realistic eye on value.
24

SEATING
25

FLAVORS
SEATING
Flavors Stack Chair Model 11848
16" seat height, ‘B’ Shell. Shown in Apple.
Model 11849
18" seat height, ‘A’ Shell.
Shown in Persian Blue.
Model 11848
16" seat height, ‘B’ Shell.
Shown in Mint.
Model 11847
14" seat height, ‘B’ Shell.
Shown in Clementine.
Model 11846
12" seat height, ‘C’ Shell.
Shown in Purple.
Model 11845
10" seat height, ‘C’ Shell.
Shown in Red.
CONTEMPORARY IN APPEARANCE AND FUNCTION.
It wasn’t just current fashion that shaped the new
Flavors Seating. It was also influenced by the
demands of the active classroom: Students today
don’t always face the front, so the Flavors Chair
offers comfort to the student facing back or front,
left or right. Similarly, the back of the Flavors Chair
offers just the right amount of flex to allow the
student to move and adjust their posture, which
promotes better concentration.
• The shell rests on the frame, not rivets, to add comfort.
• High-density polypropylene with color throughout
the shell.
• Durable glides with non-staining nylon bases come
standard, or choose optional felt glides.
• The legs are strong, 18-gauge welded steel with a
durable chrome finish.
26 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Available in 14 designer colors
Apple
Black
Blueberry
Burgundy Clementine Forest Green
Stacking Chairs in
the Flavors Seating
line stack five high.
Flavors Chair
Color Choices
Fuchsia Mint Navy Persian Blue
Purple Red White Yellow
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
AppleQS
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
NavyQS
Persian BlueQS
Purple
Red
White
Yellow
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Flavors Stacking Chairs
11849QS ‘A’ shell 18" 10 lbs.
11848 ‘B’ shell 16" 9 lbs.
11847 ‘B’ shell 14" 9 lbs.
11846 ‘C’ shell 12" 7 lbs.
11845 ‘C’ shell 10" 7 lbs.
Optional Wire Bookrack - Chrome
17231QS 14 1 /2"d x 17"w x 2 1 /2"h 2 lbs.
Glide base option for Flavors Stack Chair
All glides are swivel base and chrome plated steel cover.
Nylon base is standard. Optional is felt base.
Felt base glides Model 17531
set of 4
This is a factory installed option not available for field installation.
Glide option must be on original chair order.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
27

FLAVORS
COMBO DESK
Flavors Combo Desk Model 11835V
Shown in Pewter Mesh top with Persian Blue
edge and seat. Chrome frame is standard on all
Flavors Combo Desks.
THE COMBO DESK REINTERPRETED
When the curriculum centers on lectures, individual
work and testing, the new Flavors Combo Desk must
be considered. For that kind of environment, where
student concentration is crucial, the advanced
ergonomics of the Flavors Chair can contribute
improved achievement and success. For design
harmony, the edge molding or band can be
coordinated with the color of the chair.
• Choose high-pressure laminate or hard plastic top.
• The shell rests on the frame, not rivets, to add comfort.
• High-density polypropylene with color throughout
the shell.
• Durable glides with non-staining nylon bases come
standard, or choose optional felt glides.
• The chrome-plated frame is strong, 18-gauge welded
steel.
28 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CONTEMPORARY LOOK, ERGONOMICS
The needs of today’s classroom are what
shaped the Flavors Combo Desk, making it
look efficient, ergonomic and embracing.
SPACE EFFICIENT
Flavors Combo Desks provide
ample workspace while
maximizing floor space.
Flavors Combo Desk Color Choices
Choose Top Color: Amber Cherry, Blond Echo,
Cherry, Grey Mesh, Grey Nebula, Golden Oak,
Maple, New Age Oak, Pewter Mesh, Tan Echo.
Choose Edge Color: Apple, Black, Blueberry,
Burgundy, Champagne, Chocolate, Clementine,
Forest Green, Fuchsia, Mint, Navy, Persian Blue,
Platinum, Purple, Red, White, Yellow.
Flavors P-Tablet Arm Chair Model 11820V
Shown in Grey Mesh top with Apple edge.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Flavors Combo Desk - 18"d X 24"w top
11835V Right hand 18"h 27 lbs.
11836V Left hand 18"h 27 lbs.
Hard Plastic Top Flavors Combo Desk - 18"d X 24"w top
11838 Right hand 18"h 27 lbs.
11839 Left hand 18"h 27 lbs.
Flavors P-Tablet Arm Chair - 20"d X 17"w top
Choice 2 & 4 not available
11820V Right hand 18"h 21 lbs.
11821V Left hand 18"h 21 lbs.
Optional Combo Desk Bookrack - Chrome
17232 14 1 /2"d x 17"w x 2 1 /2"h 2 lbs.
Optional Wire Bookrack - for P-Tablet Arm Chair
17231 14 1 /2"d x 17"w x 2 1 /2"h 2 lbs.
Optional Felt Base Glide
17531 set of 4
This is a factory installed option not available for field installation.
Glide option must be on original chair order.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Choose Seat Color: Apple, Black, Blueberry,
Burgundy, Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia, Mint,
Navy, Persian Blue, Purple, Red, White, Yellow.
Hard Plastic Top Desk Color Choices
Choose Top Color: Grey, Maple, Oak, Sand or
Cherry.
Choose Seat Color: Apple, Black, Blueberry,
Burgundy, Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia, Mint,
Navy, Persian Blue, Purple, Red, White, Yellow.
Flavors Combo Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 6 is standard on Flavors Combo Desks.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
29

FLAVORS
ADJUSTABLE CHAIR
AND STOOL
Flavors Adjustable Chair
Model 11840
Shown in Apple.
Our newest chair rises to new heights.
Offering an adjustable chair and stool version
of Flavors Seating was a must. After all, when
you combine the little bit of flex in the back of
the chair together with the ability to custom
fit the chair height, the result is a very, very
comfortable chair. It’s a great option for use
in computer labs, art rooms and offices.
• Flavors Seating adjustable chair height ranges from 15-20".
• Adjustable stool height ranges from 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2".
• The shell rests on the frame, not rivets, to add comfort.
• High-density polypropylene with color throughout the shell.
• Both models available with 2" casters or glides.
• Stool model comes with chrome footrest.
• Available in 14 designer colors.
30 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Flavors Chair Shell
Color Choices
Flavors Adjustable Stool
Model 11843
Glides. Shown in Apple.
Flavors Adjustable Stool
Model 11842
Casters. Shown in Blueberry.
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
AppleQS
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
NavyQS
Persian BlueQS
Purple
Red
White
Yellow
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
AVAILABLE IN 14 DESIGNER COLORS
White
Yellow
Apple
Black
Red
Blueberry
Purple
Acrobat Bullet Workstation Model 26516
Shown in Maple top with Clementine edge and
Champagne frame. See pg. 173 to order.
Burgundy
Persian Blue
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Flavors Adjustable Chair
11840QS A Shell, Casters 16-21" 26 lbs.
11841QS A Shell, Glides 16-21" 26 lbs.
11830 B Shell, Casters 14-18" 26 lbs.
11831 B Shell, Glides 14-18" 26 lbs.
Flavors Adjustable Stool
11842QS A Shell, Casters 22-32" 34 lbs.
11843QS A Shell, Glides 22-32" 34 lbs.
Navy
Mint
Fuchsia
Forest Green
Clementine
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
31

INTUIT
STACK CHAIR
The Intuit Chair comes in four seat heights with
various base options: Stack Chair, Sled Base,
Stool and Adjustable.
Now for Students from K through College.
There’s an Intuit Chair for every grade level
to make students of all sizes comfortable
throughout the day. The Intuit Chair comes in
four heights, with shell sizes proportioned to
fit the students. For grades K-4, choose either
the 13" or 15" Intuit Chair. For ages 12 and up,
choose the 18" Intuit Chair with the new ‘A’ shell,
designed for grades 6-12. And, for grades 10 and
up, choose the 19" Intuit Chair with the ‘A+’ Shell.
• No sharp edges around handle.
• The light texture on the chair surface resists scratching.
• Mig-welded 16-gauge steel frame.
• Swivel chrome plated glides come with nylon base; felt
base optional.
• The shell rests on the frame, not on rivets.
• 3 sizes of shells available: ‘A+’ on 19" seat height; ‘A’ on
18" seat height and ‘B’ on 15" and 13" seat height.
32 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Intuit Stack Chairs
Shown with Platinum frame.
Model 00510
19" seat height, ‘A+’ Shell.
Shown in Clementine.
Model 00509
18" seat height, ‘A’ Shell.
Shown in Burgundy.
Model 00513
15" seat height, ‘B’ Shell.
Shown in Red.
Model 00514
13" seat height, ‘B’ Shell.
Shown in Purple.
The Intuit Chair
stacks neatly.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Intuit Stacking Chairs
00510QS powdercoat ‘A+’ Shell 19" 15 lbs.
00509QS powdercoat ‘A’ Shell 18" 15 lbs.
00513QS powdercoat ‘B’ Shell 15" 9 lbs.
00514QS powdercoat ‘B’ Shell 13" 9 lbs.
Glide base option for
Intuit Stack Chair
All glides are swivel base
and chrome plated steel
cover. Nylon base is
standard. Optional is
felt base.
Felt base glides
Model 72134F
set of 4
This is a factory installed
option not available for
field installation.
Glide option must be on
original chair order.
Intuit Chair
Color Choices
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
AppleQS
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
Fuchsia
MintQS
NavyQS
Persian BlueQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
White
Yellow
CHOOSE FRAME COLOR:
Black
Champagne
PlatinumQS
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
33

INTUIT
SLED BASE CHAIR
Model 00520
19" seat height, ‘A+’ Shell.
Shown in Black.
The Chair with More Style Comes in More Styles.
The Sled Base Intuit Chair offers easy off-floor storage while not
in use – it balances securely on the desktop without needing to
be turned upside down. And because it’s an Intuit Chair, it also
offers great ergonomics to help the student concentrate. The
Intuit Sled Base Chair is available in four heights, making the
line suitable for students from kindergarten through college.
• No sharp edges around handle.
• The light texture on the chair surface resists
scratches.
• Mig-welded 16-gauge steel frame.
• The shell rests on the frame.
• 3 sizes of shells available: ‘A+’ on 19" seat
height; ‘A’ on 18" seat height and ‘B’ on 15"
and 13" seat height.
34 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Intuit Sled Base Chairs
Shown with Platinum base.
Model 00520
19" seat height, ‘A+’ Shell.
Shown in Apple.
Model 00519
18" seat height, ‘A’ Shell.
Shown in Yellow.
Model 00523
15" seat height, ‘B’ Shell.
Shown in Mint.
Model 00524
13" seat height, ‘B’ Shell.
Shown in White
Intuit Chair
Color Choices
Intuit Adjustable Stool
Model 00540
‘A+’ Shell. Shown in Navy.
Intuit Adjustable Chair
Model 00531
Model 00533
‘A+’ Shell. Shown in Blueberry. ‘B’ Shell. Shown in Persian Blue.
Intuit Adjustable Chairs & Adjustable Stools
The user can adjust the seat height to accommodate the
work surface or seating needs. 5 star bases come in Black.
Available with casters or glides.
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
AppleQS
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
Fuchsia
MintQS
NavyQS
Persian BlueQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
White
Yellow
CHOOSE FRAME COLOR:
Black
Champagne
PlatinumQS
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Intuit Sled Base Chairs
00520QS powdercoat ‘A+’ Shell 19" 17 lbs.
00519QS powdercoat ‘A’ Shell 18" 12 lbs.
00523QS powdercoat ‘B’ Shell 15" 11 lbs.
00524QS powdercoat ‘B’ Shell 13" 11 lbs.
‘A+’ Shell Intuit Sled Base Chair is 25" wide.
We recommend the ‘B’ Shell for up to grade 4.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Intuit Adjustable Chairs
00530QS ‘A+’ Shell, glides 16 - 21" 29 lbs.
00531QS ‘A+’ Shell, 2" casters 16 - 21" 29 lbs.
00532QS ‘B’ Shell, glides 14 - 18" 29 lbs.
00533QS ‘B’ Shell, 2" casters 14 - 18" 29 lbs.
Intuit Adjustable Stools
00540QS ‘A+’ Shell, glides 22 - 32" 37 lbs.
00541QS ‘A+’ Shell, 2" casters 22 - 32" 37 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
35

UXL
STACKING CHAIR
Persian Blue
Model XL183PJPJ
White
Model XL183PMPM
Red
Model XL183PLPL
UXL 18"h Stacking Chair
Shown in Red/Platinum, White/
Platinum and Persian Blue/Platinum.
UXL Stacking Chairs can be ganged together
with a Long Ganging Device (Model 70861)
that has a display card allowing a seat number
and row to be indicated.
It All Starts Here.
A glance at our new UXL Stacking Chair is sure to
reveal its generous proportions that comfortably
accommodate adults and young adults. What you may
not see so readily are the subtle features that make the
UXL Stacking Chair one of the most exciting ideas in
seating we’ve ever offered – features like the specially
notched glides that both protect the legs from
scraping and hold the chairs securely when stacked.
Another exciting idea is the UXL Stacking Chair’s
versatility. It allows you to customize the chair so many
ways. First, with your choice of either upholstered or
non-upholstered seats. Next, colors: You choose from
a diverse palette – and you can choose the same or
different colors for the seat and seat back. Finally,
customize the functionality with book baskets, arms
and linking devices.
The UXL Stacking Chair complements the entire line
of UXL furnishings, including desking and tables.
This allows you to create a unified design scheme
throughout the building.
36 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL Stack Chair Choices
STANDARD GLIDE: Platinum (3)
White
Fuchsia
1
CHOOSE SEAT MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P) or Fabric* (F)
*Standard lead time applies
Persian Blue
Apple
2
CHOOSE SEAT COLOR: AppleQS (A),
BlackQS (B), BlueberryQS (C),
Burgundy (D), ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
MintQS (H), NavyQS (I),
Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White* (M) or Yellow (N).
*White available in Polypropylene only.
STANDARD BACK MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P)
UXL Stacking Chairs can also be ganged
together with the standard self linking feature.
Durable Book Basket (Model 77930 PLT)
attaches quickly and easily to the UXL
Chair. Available in Platinum only.
3
CHOOSE BACK COLOR: AppleQS (A),
BlackQS (B), BlueberryQS (C),
Burgundy (D), ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
MintQS (H), NavyQS (I),
Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
Premium Trolley provides stable,
maneuverable transport of 10 UXL
Stacking Chairs. Features: locking
casters, a padded handle that folds away
for compact storage and four anchoring
cups – one for each chair leg.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
4 CHOOSE OPTIONAL ARM:
w/both Left and Right Arm (LR)
If you do not want arms, simply leave
spots blank.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Stacking Chairs
XL183P_P_QS 18"h with Glides (Polypropylene Seat) 13 lbs.
XL183F_P_ 18"h with Glides (Fabric Seat) 14 lbs.
UXL Stacking Chairs with both Left and Right Arm
XL183P_P_LRQS 18"h with Glides (Polypropylene Seat) 17 lbs.
XL183F_P_LR 18"h with Glides (Fabric Seat) 18 lbs.
Model Description
Chair Accessories
77930 PLTQS Book Basket
70861QS Long Ganging Device
17580QS Felt Glide Set
55016 BLAQS Premium Stack Chair Dolly
XL 18 3 _ _ P _ _ _
UXL Chair
18'' standard height
standard platinum glide
choose seat material
1 2 3 4
choose seat color
standard polypropylene back
choose back color
choose optional arm
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
37

UXL
MOBILE & ADJUSTABLE CHAIR
Order the UXL Mobile Chair
with or without arms.
UXL Mobile Chair Choices
STANDARD CASTER:
Platinum (7)
1
CHOOSE SEAT MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P) or Fabric* (F)
*Standard lead time applies
2
CHOOSE SEAT COLOR:
AppleQS (A), BlackQS (B),
BlueberryQS (C) Burgundy (D),
ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
MintQS (H), NavyQS (I),
Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White* (M) or Yellow (N).
*White available in Polypropylene
only.
STANDARD BACK MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P)
White
Black
3
CHOOSE BACK COLOR:
AppleQS (A), BlackQS (B),
BlueberryQS (C), Burgundy (D),
ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
MintQS (H), NavyQS (I),
Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
More Ways to Add Mobility.
When the need is for mobile seating to accommodate adults and
young adults, the UXL line gives you several great choices. You can
start with either the UXL Mobile Chair or the UXL Adjustable Chair.
4 CHOOSE OPTIONAL ARM:
w/both Left and
Right Arm (LR).
If you do not
want arms,
simply leave
spots blank.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Mobile Stack Chairs
XL187P_P_QS 18"h with Casters (Polypropylene Seat) 14 lbs.
XL187F_P_ 18"h with Casters (Fabric Seat) 15 lbs.
UXL Mobile Stack Chairs with both Left and Right Arm
XL187P_P_LRQS 18"h with Casters (Polypropylene Seat) 19 lbs.
XL187F_P_LR 18"h with Casters (Fabric Seat) 20 lbs.
XL 18 7 _ _ P _ _ _
UXL Chair
18'' standard height
standard platinum caster
choose seat material
1 2 3 4
choose seat color
standard polypropylene back
choose back color
choose arm option
38 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

1
UXL Adjustable Chair Choices
CHOOSE CHAIR OR STOOL: Adjustable
chair (03) or Adjustable stool (04)
2
CHOOSE GLIDE OR CASTER:
Black Glide (1) or Black Caster (5)
The UXL Adjustable Chair
with Navy Upholstered Seat
Model XL035FIPILR
Shown in Navy Plastic Back with left/right
arms and casters. Adjusts 15"-21"h.
The UXL Adjustable Stool
with Yellow Upholstered Seat
Model XL045FNPN
It can be raised from 23 1 /2"h all the way
up to 30"h. Shown in Yellow Plastic
Back with casters.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Adjustable Chair
XL031P_P_QS 15-21"h with Glides 25 lbs.
XL035P_P_QS 15-21"h with Casters 22 lbs.
XL031P_P_LRQS 15-21"h with Glides (With Arms) 31 lbs.
XL035P_P_LRQS 15-21"h with Casters (With Arms) 29 lbs.
XL031F_P_ 15-21"h with Glides (Fabric Seat) 23 lbs.
XL035F_P_ 15-21"h with Casters (Fabric Seat) 20 lbs.
XL031F_P_LR 15-21"h with Glides (Fabric Seat & Arms) 29 lbs.
XL035F_P_LR 15-21"h with Casters (Fabric Seat & Arms) 27 lbs.
UXL Adjustable Stool
XL041P_P_QS 23 1 /2-30"h with Glides 29 lbs.
XL045P_P_QS 23 1 /2-30"h with Casters 26 lbs.
XL041P_P_LRQS 23 1 /2-30"h with Glides (With Arms) 32 lbs.
XL045P_P_LRQS 23 1 /2-30"h with Casters (With Arms) 29 lbs.
XL041F_P_ 23 1 /2-30"h with Glides (Fabric Seat) 27 lbs.
XL045F_P_ 23 1 /2-30"h with Casters (Fabric Seat) 24 lbs.
XL041F_P_LR 23 1 /2-30"h with Glides (Fabric Seat & Arms) 30 lbs.
XL045F_P_LR 23 1 /2-30"h with Casters (Fabric Seat & Arms) 27 lbs.
3
4
5
6
CHOOSE SEAT MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P) or Fabric* (F)
*Standard lead time applies
CHOOSE SEAT COLOR: AppleQS (A),
BlackQS (B), BlueberryQS (C),
Burgundy (D), ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
MintQS (H), NavyQS (I),
Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White* (M) or Yellow (N).
*White available in Polypropylene only.
STANDARD BACK MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P)
CHOOSE BACK COLOR: AppleQS (A),
BlackQS (B), BlueberryQS (C),
Burgundy (D), ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
MintQS (H), NavyQS (I),
Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
CHOOSE OPTIONAL ARM:
w/both Left and Right Arm (LR).
If you do not want arms, simply leave
spots blank.
Chair Accessories
77930PLTQS Book Basket
70861QS
Stack Chair Long Ganging Device
1 2 3 4
5 6
XL _ _ _ _ _ P _ _ _
UXL Chair
choose chair or stool
choose glide or caster
choose seat material
choose seat color
standard polypropylene back
choose back color
choose arm (optional)
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
39

UXL
TABLET ARM CHAIR
UXL FoldAway Tablet
Arm Chair
UXL 18"h Chair
with Right FoldAway Tablet Arm
Model XL183PJPJNF
Shown in Persian Blue/Platinum. UXL Tablet
Arm Chairs can be linked together with our
optional Long Ganging Device.
UXL 18"h Chair
with Left FoldAway Tablet Arm
Model XL183PBPBFN
Shown in Black/Platinum.
Fixed or Folding, the Choice is Yours.
When fitted with a P-Tablet or FoldAway Tablet Arm,
the UXL Tablet Arm Chair efficiently accommodates
secondary and post-secondary students.
With the tablet folded, the UXL FoldAway Tablet Arm
Chair offers the student almost unrestricted access;
when in the writing position, stability. The tablet’s
folding action also reduces restriction during egress.
Its hands-free operation earned the nickname
“anti-panic” tablet because when the student stands
up, his/her leg moves the tablet out of the way.
Made of durable ABS plastic, it comes in Black.
The UXL P-Tablet Arm Chair offers maximum stability
and sensible ergonomics. The arm measures 3 /4" thick
with a high-pressure laminate surface and 3 /4" Bullet
T-Mold stapled in place every 6-8" so students can’t
pick it out.
Seats and seat backs come in a diverse palette of
colors - you can choose to mix and match the seat and
seat back. You can also outfit both chairs with the
optional Book Basket.
UXL Tablet Arm Chairs complement the entire line of
UXL furnishings. This allows you to create a unified
design scheme throughout the building.
40 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL P-Tablet Arm Chair
UXL 18"h Chair with P-Tablet Arm
Model XL183PLPLNTGMEL
Chair shown in Red/Platinum.
P-Tablet shown in Grey Mesh laminate with Red Bullet
T-Mold.
UXL Tablet Arm Chair Choices
STANDARD GLIDE: Platinum Glide (3)
1
STANDARD SEAT MATERIAL: Polypropylene (P)
CHOOSE SEAT COLOR: AppleQS (A), BlackQS (B),
BlueberryQS (C), Burgundy (D), ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G), MintQS (H),
NavyQS (I), Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
STANDARD BACK MATERIAL: Polypropylene (P)
2
CHOOSE BACK COLOR: AppleQS (A), BlackQS (B),
BlueberryQS (C), Burgundy (D), ClementineQS (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G), MintQS (H),
NavyQS (I), Persian BlueQS (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
Model Description Wt.
UXL FoldAway Tablet Arm Chair
XL183P_P_NFQS 18"h with Right FoldAway Tablet 19 lbs.
XL183P_P_FNQS 18"h with Left FoldAway Tablet 19 lbs.
UXL P-Tablet Tablet Arm Chair
XL183P_P_NT_ _ _ _QS 18"h with Right P-Tablet Option 24 lbs.
XL183P_P_TN_ _ _ _QS 18"h with Left P-Tablet Option 24 lbs.
UXL Chair Accessories
77930 PLTQS Book Basket
70861QS
Long Ganging Device
XL
18 3 P _ P _ _ _
UXL Chair
18'' standard height
standard platinum glide
standard seat material
1 2 3
choose seat color
standard polypropylene back
choose back color
choose arm option
*Steps 4 and 5 for P-Tablet Only*
4 5
_ _ _
_
choose tablet laminate color
choose tablet edge color
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
UXL 18"h Chair with
P-Tablet Arm
Model XL183PAPANTGMEA
Chair shown in Apple/Platinum.
P-Tablet shown in Grey Mesh
laminate with Apple Bullet T-Mold.
Shown with optional Book Basket
(Model 77930 PLT)
3
4
5
CHOOSE OPTIONAL ARMS:
FoldAway: (Black only)
FoldAway Tablet Left, w/No
Right Arm (NF)
No Left Arm, w/FoldAway
Tablet Right (FN)
P-Tablet:
No Left Arm, w/Tablet Right
Arm (NT)
Tablet Left Arm, w/No Right
Arm (TN)
*Steps 4 and 5 for P-Tablet Only*
CHOOSE P-TABLET LAMINATE COLOR:
Amber Cherry (AMC), Blond Echo (BEC),
Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
CHOOSE P-TABLET EDGE COLOR: Apple (A), Black (B),
Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D), Chocolate (Q),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
41

UXL
BEAM SEATING
See How Many Choices You Can Make in a Row.
From lecture room to a common area to a reception area,
UXL Beam Seating can be configured to meet a wide
variety of seating needs throughout the campus. Individual
UXL Beam Seating units can comfortably accommodate
from two to five.
Now for your choices. First, choose either free-standing or
floor-mounted seating – both offer excellent stability. Seats
and seat backs come in a diverse palette of colors – and
you can choose the same or different colors for the seat
and seat back. For a classroom or lecture hall setting,
choose our Folding Tablet Arm. For a reception area, you
can choose optional arms. Tables, another great choice for
reception areas, are available in a wide variety of finishes.
UXL Beam Seating complements the entire line of UXL
furnishings, including desking and tables. This allows you to
create a unified design scheme throughout the facility.
UXL 3-Beam Seat Model BG1PLPL0012
With two Right and one Left FoldAway Tablet Arm
with Glide Leg Set. Shown in Red/Platinum.
42 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL Beam Seating Choices
STANDARD LEG SET: With Glides (BG)
1
CHOOSE NUMBER OF SEATS: 2 seats (0), 3 seats (1), 4 seats (2),
5 seats (3), 1 seat/1 table (4), 2 seats/1 table (5), 3 seats/1 table (6),
4 seats/1 table (7), 2 seats/2 tables (8), 3 seats/2 tables (9).
UXL 3-Beam Seat Model BG1PLPL
With Glide Set. Shown in Red/Platinum.
2
STANDARD SEAT MATERIAL: Polypropylene (P)
CHOOSE SEAT COLOR: Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G), Mint (H), Navy (I),
Persian Blue (J), Purple (K), Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
3
STANDARD BACK MATERIAL: Polypropylene (P)
CHOOSE BACK COLOR: Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G), Mint (H), Navy (I),
Persian Blue (J), Purple (K), Red (L), White (M) or Yellow (N).
Optional Accessories
ARM OPTIONS:
4 CHOOSE LEFT ARM:
5 CHOOSE RIGHT ARM:
No Arm (0), One Arm (1), No Arm (0), One Arm (1),
Two Arms (2), Three Arms (3), Two Arms (2), Three Arms (3),
Four Arms (4), Five Arms (5) Four Arms (4), Five Arms (5)
UXL 3-Beam Seat Model BG1PJPJ22
With two Left and two Right Arms with Glide Leg Set.
Shown in Persian Blue/Platinum.
FOLDAWAY TABLET ARM OPTIONS:
6 CHOOSE LEFT TABLET ARM:
No Arm (0), One Arm (1),
7
Two Arms (2), Three Arms (3),
Four Arms (4), Five Arms (5)
CHOOSE RIGHT TABLET ARM:
No Arm (0), One Arm (1),
Two Arms (2), Three Arms (3),
Four Arms (4), Five Arms (5)
BM1818_ _ _ _
8
CHOOSE TABLE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK), Maple (MAP),
New Age Oak (NAO), Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
9
CHOOSE TABLE EDGE COLOR: Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C),
Burgundy (D), Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K), Red (L), White (M)
or Yellow (N).
UXL 3-Beam Seat Model BG5PJPJ0000GMEJ
With Glide Leg Set with two Persian Blue Seats
and 1 - 18" x 18" Pewter Mesh/Persian Blue Table.
Model
Description
UXL Beam Seating
BG0P_P_ UXL Beam Seating (2 Seat)
BG1P_P_ UXL Beam Seating (3 Seat)
BG2P_P_ UXL Beam Seating (4 Seat)
BG3P_P_ UXL Beam Seating (5 Seat)
BM1818_ _ _ _ 18" X 18" Table option* subtract
*(Instead of seat. Subtract cost from Beam Seating cost)
standard glide leg set
BG _ P _ P _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
choose number of seats
No.s 4-9 are optional accessories
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
standard polypropylene seat
choose seat color
standard polypropylene back
choose back color
choose left arm option
choose right arm option
choose foldaway tablet left arm option
choose foldaway tablet right arm option
choose table laminate color
choose table edge color
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
43

UXL
NEST & FOLD CHAIR
UXL Nest & Fold Chair Model NF187FJPJLR
Shown in Persian Blue Fabric Seat/Persian Blue
Plastic Back with Left/Right Arms.
Versatility to Go and Stow.
Created to comfortably accommodate adults and young adults, the
UXL Nest & Fold Chair offers two additional functionalities. One: it is
highly mobile thanks to smooth rolling casters and, because the chairs
nest together, large numbers can be easily transported from one room
to the next. Two: compact storage thanks to their nesting ability.
UXL Nest & Fold Chairs have upholstered seats. Seats and backs
come in a diverse palette of colors – and you can choose the same or
different colors for the seat and back. For added comfort, arms are
available.
UXL Nest & Fold Chairs complement the entire line of UXL furnishings,
including desking and tables. This allows you to create a unified
design scheme throughout the facility.
44 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
The casters on UXL Nest & Fold Chairs make ingress and
egress easier at meeting tables. The arms allow plenty of
clearance below the tabletop. UXL Nest & Fold Chairs
shown in Mint/Blueberry with optional arms. Shown with
optional UXL Nest & Fold Tables, see pg. 163.

UXL Nest & Fold Chairs are available in a diverse palette
of colors to complement any environment. Shown in
Mint, Blueberry (with optional arms), Persian Blue (with
optional arms) and Apple.
UXL Nest & Fold Chair Choices
STANDARD CASTER: Platinum (7)
UXL Nest & Fold Chairs Model NF187FHPH
Shown in Mint. Nest to save space.
UXL Nest & Fold Chairs can be moved
together. Because they don’t require
stacking or extra equipment for transport,
they save time, effort and expense. Shown
in Persian Blue, Apple and Blueberry with
optional arms.
1
STANDARD SEAT MATERIAL: Fabric (F)
CHOOSE SEAT COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C),
Burgundy (D), Clementine (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J),
Purple (K), Red (L) or Yellow (N).
STANDARD BACK MATERIAL:
Polypropylene (P)
UXL Nest & Fold Chairs. Shown in Persian Blue/Apple with
optional arms. Shown with optional UXL Nest & Fold Table,
see pg. 83 to order.
2
CHOOSE BACK COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C),
Burgundy (D), Clementine (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J),
Purple (K), Red (L), White (M)
or Yellow (N).
Model Description Wt.
UXL Nest & Fold Chair
NF187F_P_ 18"h with Casters (Fabric Seat) 16 lbs.
UXL Nest & Fold Chair with both Left and Right Arm
NF187F_P_LR 18"h with Casters (Fabric Seat) 21 lbs.
3
CHOOSE OPTIONAL ARM:
w/both Left and
Right Arm (LR)
If you do not want
arms, simply leave
spots blank.
NF 18 7 F _ P _ _ _
UXL Chair
18'' standard height
standard platinum caster
standard fabric seat
1 2 3
choose seat color
standard polypropylene back
choose back color
choose arm option
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
45

BRILLIANT
CHAIR
Brilliant Stack Chair Model 11870
Shown in Burgundy. Shown with optional
Wire Bookrack, Model 17230.
Student Seating Optimized.
Made of tough ABS plastic, the Brilliant
Chair is extremely functional and priced for
the more flexible budget. With an eye on
value, you can select from stacking chairs,
adjustable chairs and adjustable stools.
The stacking chairs are especially popular
because they weigh just 10 lbs. each – and
that saves a load for anyone who stacks
and rearranges chairs throughout the day.
What else makes Brilliant Chairs a brilliant
choice? Read on.
• MIG-welded, 14-gauge steel
backbrace.
• The light texture chair surface
resists cracking and staining.
• Our legendary outside-hold glides
hold stronger, longer.
• Durable 16-gauge steel tubes in
X-frame design prevent rear leg
collapse.
Brilliant Stack Chair
Model 11871
Shown in Blueberry.
46 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

11 1 /2"h Purple
Model 11868
13 1 /2"h Mint
Model 11867
15 1 /2"h Red
Model 11871
17 1 /2"h Clementine
Model 11870
Brilliant
Adjustable Stool
Model 11816
Shown in Black.
Comes with footrest.
9 1 /2"h Forest Green
Model 11869
Brilliant
Adjustable Chair
Model 11811
Shown in Navy.
Brilliant Chair
Color Choices
The Brilliant Chair stacks neatly.
Glide base option for Brilliant Stack Chair
All glides are outside hold with swivel base and chrome plated steel cover.
Nylon base is standard. Optional are steel base and felt base.
Steel base glides
Model 17558
set of 4
Felt base glides
Model 17559
set of 4
This is a factory installed option not available for field installation.
Glide option must be on original chair order.
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
MintQS
NavyQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
Model Description Seat Height Wt. Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Brilliant Stacking Chairs
Brilliant Adjustable Chairs
11870QS chrome legs 17 1 /2" 10 lbs.
11871QS chrome legs 15 1 /2" 10 lbs.
11867QS chrome legs 13 1 /2" 8 lbs.
11868QS chrome legs 11 1 /2" 8 lbs.
Brilliant Adjustable Stools
11869QS chrome legs 9 1 /2" 8 lbs.
Optional Wire Bookrack — for Model 11870 & Model 11871
17230QS 13 1 /2"d x 16"w x 2 1 /2"h 2 lbs.
11811QS 2" casters 15 - 20" 22 lbs.
11812QS glides 15 - 20" 22 lbs.
11816QS 2" casters 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2" 30 lbs.
11817QS glides 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2" 30 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
47

ASTUTE
CHAIR
Astute Stack Chair Model 00605
Shown in Red.
Colorful, Comfortable Seating.
The Astute Chair takes standard plastic shell
seating to a new level of comfort, ergonomics
and affordability. Other one-piece chairs
might crack and split, but the Astute Chair’s
shell is sturdy and strong. It's designed to
encourage proper posture and hold students
in place. It's based on one of our chair
designs that has performed well in
classrooms for decades.
• We use high-density polypropylene with color throughout
the shell.
• The shell rests on the frame, not rivets. It’s also attached to
the frame at the seat base.
• Chairs stack 10 high.
• Our legendary, outside-hold glides really stay on.
• The legs are strong, 18-gauge welded steel.
48 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

17 1 /2"h Forest Green
Model 00605
15 1 /2"h Black
Model 00606
13 1 /2"h Navy
Model 00607
11 1 /2"h Burgundy
Model 00608
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Astute Stacking Chairs
00605QS chrome legs 17 1 /2" 10 lbs.
00606QS chrome legs 15 1 /2" 10 lbs.
00607QS chrome legs 13 1 /2" 6 lbs.
00608QS chrome legs 11 1 /2" 6 lbs.
Astute Adjustable Chairs
00813QS casters 15 - 21" 22 lbs.
00814QS glides 15 - 21" 22 lbs.
Astute Adjustable Chair
Model 00814
Shown in Mint.
Glide base option for Astute Stack Chair
All glides are outside hold with swivel base and chrome plated steel cover.
Nylon base is standard. Optional are steel base and felt base.
Steel base glides
Model 17558
set of 4
Felt base glides
Model 17559
set of 4
This is a factory installed option not available for field installation.
Glide option must be on original chair order.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Astute Adjustable Chair
Model 00813
Shown in Blueberry.
Astute Chair
Color Choices
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
MintQS
NavyQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
49

VIKING
CHAIR
Viking Stack Chair Model 02605
Shown in Navy with Chrome frame.
Easy-Care Stacking Classroom Chair.
This chair offers some of the most often-requested
features of a classroom chair. For starters, easy care,
thanks to the seat and back's tough, smooth finish
that resists stains and scratches. Next, there's
durability, exemplified by frame and legs finished in
either chrome or a tough powdercoat. Finally, easy
storage: the Viking Chair can be stacked or turned
upside down and put on a desktop. All models meet
California fire code CAL TB133.
• Legendary outside hold glides. Built to stand up to
years of tough use without letting go. Glides feature a
nylon base to prevent staining floors.
• Durable chrome frame or powdercoat finish in
Champagne, Platinum and Black.
• Backbrace constructed of 14-gauge steel, MIG-welded
for strength.
50 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Viking Stack Chair
Model 02600
Shown in Cherry with
Black frame.
Viking Stack Chair
Model 02600
Shown in Oak with
Champagne frame.
Viking Stack Chair
Model 02600
Shown in Maple with
Platinum frame.
Viking Chair
Color Choices
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
Black
Burgundy
Cherry
Maple
Navy
Oak
Viking Adjustable Chair
Model 02791
Shown in Burgundy.
Viking Adjustable Stool
Model 02797
Shown in Navy.
Viking Stack Chair Model 02606
Shown in Burgundy with Chrome frame.
Shown with optional Wire Bookrack,
Model 17230.
CHOOSE FRAME COLOR:
Black
Champagne
Chrome
Platinum
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Viking Stack Chairs
02605 chrome legs 17 1 /2"h 18 lbs.
02606 chrome legs 15 1 /2"h 16 lbs.
02600 powdercoat legs 17 1 /2"h 18 lbs.
02601 powdercoat legs 15 1 /2"h 16 lbs.
Optional Wire Bookrack
Chrome only. For 15 1 /2" & 17 1 /2"h Stacking Chairs.
17230 13 1 /2"d x 16"w x 2 1 /2"h 2 lbs.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Viking Adjustable Chairs
02791 2" casters 15-20"h 27 lbs.
02792 glides 15-20"h 27 lbs.
Viking Adjustable Stools
02796 casters 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2" 35 lbs.
02797 glides 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2" 35 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
51

HUSKY
SEATING
Husky Stack Chair Model 00806
Shown in Blueberry.
Sturdy Stacking Chairs.
Here's a solid proven look and feel for
educational seating. The oval opening on
the back shell provides ventilation while
relieving pressure on the lower back.
High-density polypropylene holds color
throughout the material, and better yet,
both the shell and frame are recyclable.
• Narrow top allows shoulders to move freely.
• No-show rivets won't catch hair and clothing.
• Waterfall front edge allows transition for legs and no
pressure points.
• Compound contour encourages proper posture.
• Husky legs are 1 1 /2" diameter, 18-gauge steel tubing.
• Cross brace is 1" diameter, 18-gauge steel.
52 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

9 1 /2"h Forest Green
Model 00809
11 1 /2"h Burgundy
Model 00808
13 1 /2"h Mint
Model 00807
15 1 /2"h Red
Model 00806
17 1 /2"h Clementine
Model 00805
Husky stacks six high.
Shown in Purple.
Husky Chair
Color Choices
Husky Adjustable Chair
Model 00813
Shown in Navy.
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
MintQS
NavyQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Husky Stacking Chairs
00805QS chrome legs 17 1 /2" 13 lbs.
00806QS chrome legs 15 1 /2" 12 lbs.
00807QS chrome legs 13 1 /2" 10 lbs.
00808QS chrome legs 11 1 /2" 10 lbs.
00809QS chrome legs 9 1 /2" 10 lbs.
Husky Adjustable Chair
00813QS casters 15-21" 22 lbs.
00814QS glides 15-21" 22 lbs.
Size Chart for Chairs and Tables
Chair Height 9 1 /2"h 11 1 /2"h 13 1 /2"h 15 1 /2"h 17 1 /2"h
Table Height ~19" ~22" ~24" ~27" ~29"
3 – 4 year olds 50% 50%
Kindergarten 50% 50%
Grade 1 100%
Grade 2 25% 75%
Grade 3 – 4 100%
Grade 5 50% 50%
Grade 6 –12 100%
Husky is protected by US patents.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
53

CIRCUSLINE
SEATING
Circusline Stack Chair Model 02000
Shown in Navy.
Sturdy Classroom Seating.
Circusline Seating makes a bright addition
to early childhood settings. The ergonomic
shell helps the student keep proper posture
and provides support for the back and legs.
The seat and matching legs radiate color.
Choose from six big-top colors that bring
excitement to the classroom.
• Teardrop openings relieve lower back pressure.
• 18-gauge steel tubular frame.
• Outside hold glides won't damage floor.
• Polypropylene shells, legs with powdercoat finish.
• No exposed rivets.
54 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

15-20"h
Persian Blue
Model 02022
7 1 /2"h Purple Model 02012
9 1 /2"h Red Model 02004
13 1 /2"h Yellow Model 02002
11 1 /2"h Forest Green Model 02003
Circusline Adjustable Chair
Model 02022
Adjustable height moves from
15"-20"h on pneumatic lift.
Shown in Red.
15 1 /2"h Red Model 02001
17 1 /2"h Navy Model 02000
Circusline Chair
Color Choices
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
Forest GreenQS
NavyQS
Persian BlueQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
YellowQS
Circusline stack up to 10 high.
Shown in Persian Blue.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Circusline Stacking Chairs
02000QS powdercoat legs 17 1 /2" 10 lbs.
02001QS powdercoat legs 15 1 /2" 10 lbs.
02002QS powdercoat legs 13 1 /2" 6 lbs.
02003QS powdercoat legs 11 1 /2" 5 lbs.
02004QS powdercoat legs 9 1 /2" 5 lbs.
02012QS powdercoat legs 7 1 /2" 5 lbs.
Circusline Adjustable Chair
02022QS soft casters 15 - 20" 22 lbs.
02023QS glides 15 - 20" 22 lbs.
Suggested Size Chart for Chairs and Tables
Chair Height 7 1 /2"h 9 1 /2"h 11 1 /2"h 13 1 /2"h 15 1 /2"h 17 1 /2"h
Table Height ~14" ~19" ~22" ~24" ~27" ~29"
Toddlers 100%
3 – 4 year olds 50% 50%
Kindergarten 50% 50%
Grade 1 100%
Grade 2 25% 75%
Grade 3 – 4 100%
Grade 5 50% 50%
Grade 6 –12 100%
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
55

More choices for the changing American
classroom.
Innovation is the one constant in education today.
Finding more effective, more efficient ways to
impart knowledge and skills to a student body
(which, itself is changing) is a challenge for
educators, administrators, planners, designers
and architects. And Smith System.
We feel we are in a unique position to help change
American education for the better, by providing
basic tools that help students learn more readily:
desks that allow students to work in ways they’ve
never worked before (groups of eight or more),
to work with more focus and to work with a sense
of discovery and joy.
Our many lines of desking and tables allow
decision makers great latitude in choosing the
equipment that best serves the needs of the
students.
56

TABLES & DESKS
57

ELEMENTAL
DESK
Elemental Wave Top Desk Model 01476G
Shown in Grey Mesh top/Persian Blue edge, Platinum
Bookbox and leg. Shown with optional Flavors Stack
Chair, Model 11849, see pg. 26.
AN INSPIRING PART OF THE CLASSROOM.
The Elemental Desk is a great starting point for the classroom. It offers the
designer flexibility in colors and color combinations that have not been available
until now. Its design also adds flair to the classroom and makes the students
feel welcome. The Elemental Desk offers an innovative system for attaching legs
that makes installation quick and easy.
• 3 /4" high-pressure laminate top is standard.
• Bullet-shaped T-Mold contributes to a lighter profile.
• Contoured sides add strength while creating a contemporary look.
• Fully integrated pencil tray and plastic Bookbox.
• Strong, 18-gauge steel upper legs have durable powdercoat surfaces.
• Durable 16-gauge steel lower legs are chrome plated to resist wear.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
Model 01475V shown in Fusion Maple top,
Persian Blue edge, Bookbox and leg. Shown
with optional Intuit ‘B’ Stack Chair, Model 00512.
58 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Elemental Wave Top Desk Model 01476V
Shown in Blond Echo top, Clementine edge, Bookbox
and leg. Shown with optional Intuit ‘B’ Sled Base Chair,
Model 00523, see pg. 34.
Sled Base Inuit ‘B’ Chair
stores nicely on top.
ADJUSTABLE
ADJUSTABLE
23"
23"
-
-
32
32
"
"
20.00
20.00
27.00 27.00
20.81 20.81
3.92
3.92
5.56
5.56
21.31
21.31
Elemental Desk Color Choices
Elemental Wave Top Desk Model 01476V
Shown in Pewter Mesh top, Fuchsia edge, Platinum Bookbox
and leg. Shown with optional Intuit ‘B’ Sled Base Chair,
Model 00524, see pg. 34.
Elemental Hard Plastic Top Desk Model 01477
Shown with optional Viking Chair, Model 02600.
Choose Top Color: Amber Cherry, Blond Echo,
Fusion Maple, Golden Oak, Grey Mesh, Grey Nebula,
New Age Oak, Pewter Mesh, Tan Echo, Wild Cherry.
Choose Edge Color: Apple, Black, Blueberry,
Burgundy, Champagne, Chocolate, Clementine,
Forest Green, Fuchsia, Mint, Navy, Persian Blue,
Platinum, Purple, Red, White, Yellow.
Choose Plastic Bookbox Color: AppleQS, BlackQS,
BlueberryQS, Burgundy, Champagne, Chocolate,
Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia, MintQS, NavyQS,
Persian BlueQS, PlatinumQS, Purple, Red, Yellow.
Shown in Maple top,
Platinum Bookbox and leg.
Model Description Wt.
Elemental High-pressure Laminate Rectangle Top Desk
01475V 20"d x 27"w x 23-32"h 22 lbs.
Elemental High-pressure Laminate Wave Top Desk*
01476V 20"d x 27"w x 23-32"h 22 lbs.
*Choice 2 and 4 are not available on Wave Top Desk
Elemental Hard Plastic Rectangle Top Desk
01477 19 3 /8"d x 26 3 /8"w x 23-32"h 24 lbs.
Choose Top Color: Cherry, Grey, Maple, Oak or Sand.
Choose Plastic Bookbox and Leg Color (see chart).
Shown in Cherry top,
Chocolate Bookbox and leg.
Choose Leg Color: AppleQS, BlackQS, BlueberryQS,
Burgundy, Champagne, Chocolate, Clementine,
Forest Green, Fuchsia, MintQS, NavyQS, Persian BlueQS,
PlatinumQS, Purple, Red, Yellow.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Elemental Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 6 is standard on Elemental Desks.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
59

SILHOUETTE
DESK
Silhouette Student Desk Model 01650
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint Bumper T-Mold and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Steel Bookbox,
Model 17193. Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 34.
Stable, Durable Student Desk.
The Silhouette Desk is a great solution for traditional classrooms
through its elegant design and legendary Smith System durability and
functionality. The Silhouette Desk also lets you choose between two
durable high-pressure laminate tops, and a hard plastic top.
• Cantilevered design allows easy ingress and egress.
• Adjustable leg height from 22"-30" in 1" increments.
Only two (not four) legs to adjust.
• Choose from three durable desktops, 1 1 /4" thick or 3 ⁄4" thick with
high-pressure laminate surface; or hard plastic.
• Choose from several edge band treatments.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Lockable endcap/glide combination that resists tampering.
Silhouette Student Desk Model 01601
Hard plastic top. Shown in Oak top with
Champagne frame. Shown with optional
Bookbox, Model 17190. Shown with optional
Viking Chair, see pg. 51.
60 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Silhouette Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Silhouette Student Desk Model 01600V
Shown in Blond Echo top with Apple Bullet T-Mold and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Wire Bookbox,
Model 17200. Shown with optional Flavors Stack Chair,
see pg. 26.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Hard Plastic Top Desk
Color Choices
TOP Cherry
FRAME Black
Optional EW Tote Tray
w/Housing
Tote Tray pulls out on rails
for easy access to materials.
Model 30926QS
16 5 /8"d x 18 3 /8"w x 3"h Wt. 5 lbs.
Available for Models 01650
& 01651.
Optional Steel Bookbox
Model 17190
Shown in Platinum.
TOP Grey
FRAME Navy
TOP Maple
FRAME Platinum
TOP Oak
FRAME Champagne
Model Size Wt.
Silhouette Student Desk
01600QS 18"d x 24"w x 22-30"h 36 lbs.
01650QS 20"d x 27"w x 22-30"h 40 lbs.
Hard plastic top Silhouette Student Desk
01601 18"d x 24"w x 22-30"h 36 lbs.
01651 20"d x 27"w x 22-30"h 40 lbs.
Steel Bookbox*
For Models 01600 and 01601
17190QS 15"d x 20"w x 4"h 8 lbs.
For Models 01650 and 01651
17193QS 15"d x 22"w x 4"h 9 lbs.
*Black powdercoat finish. Special order Champagne & Platinum.
Wire Bookbox — Black powdercoat finish.
17200QS 15"d x 18"w x 4"h 5 lbs.
TOP Sand
FRAME Champagne
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Silhouette Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Silhouette Desks.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
61

QUICK CARREL
Quick Carrel Model 18000
Shown here: three units of Model 18000 in a row.
Shown with optional Hard Plastic Top Planner Student
Desk, Model 01291 and optional Intuit Sled Base Chair,
see pg. 34.
Individual Study Spaces in an Instant.
With Quick Carrels, you can create individual
learning environments anytime, anywhere. With
overall dimensions of 27"d x 38"w x 50 1 /2"h, they
offer stability and plenty of substance as dividers.
The short side of the Quick Carrel offers a
porcelain steel surface for dry markers and
magnets; the long side is tackable cork board.
They roll smoothly on 3" diameter, dual-wheel
casters that can be locked in place.
1 2
1 2
Model Size Wt.
Quick Carrel
18000QS 27"d x 38"w x 50 1 /2"h 58 lbs.
62 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
1 2
1 2

Together, two Quick
Carrels can create four
individual spaces.
Quick Carrels nest for
compact storage
when not in use.
Flex Student Desk Model 01369
Shown with Quick Carrel, Model 18000.
Shown in Oak top with Champagne frame.
Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 32.
Planner & Flex Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Planner Student Desk Model 01274
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge
and Champagne frame. Make mobile with optional
2" casters, Model 17459. Shown with optional
Laptop/Bookbox, Model 17194.
Planner Student Desk Model 01291
Shown in Oak top with Champagne frame. Make
mobile with optional 2" casters, Model 17549.
Shown with optional Viking Chair, see pg. 50.
For Hard Plastic Top Color Choices, see pg. 61.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt. Model Size Wt.
Planner Student Desk
Flex Student Desk
01274QS 20"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 42 lbs.
01368QS 20"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 50 lbs.
01286QS 24"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 50 lbs.
01371QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 55 lbs.
Planner Student Desk — Hard Plastic Top
01291 20"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 42 lbs.
2" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack — for wheelbarrow mobility
17549QS set of 2, 1 locking 8 lbs.
Flex Student Desk — Hard Plastic Top
01369 20"d x 36"w x 22-30"h 50 lbs.
2" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17552QS set of 4, 2 locking 2 lbs.
Side Bookbox/Laptop Holder — for 36" wide desks and larger
17194QS 12"d x 8"w x 16"h 10 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
63

ACTIVITY
TABLES
Half Moon Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top
with Persian Blue edge and
Persian Blue frame. Shown
with optional Circusline
Chairs, see pg. 55.
Versatile Learning Centers.
Activity Tables capture the bright excitement of
childhood learning. Choose from several sizes.
• Strong, 18-gauge steel upper leg is 1 1 /8" in diameter,
protected with a durable powdercoat surface.
• Sturdy 1 1 /4" desktop with a high-pressure laminate
surface above and durable backing sheet below.
• 3 /8" thick bumper edge stapled in place every eight
inches.
• Rugged, 16-gauge steel lower leg is 1" in diameter,
chrome plated for protection.
Top Size 21-30"h 15-24"h 11-16"h Wt.
Rectangle Activity Tables
24"d x 36"w 01003QS 01004QS 01005QS 42 lbs.
24"d x 48"w 01013QS 01014QS 01015QS 52 lbs.
24"d x 60"w 01913QS 01914QS 01915QS 62 lbs.
30"d x 48"w 01023QS 01024QS 01025QS 62 lbs.
30"d x 60"w 01033QS 01034QS 01035QS 75 lbs.
30"d x 72"w 01043QS 01044QS 01045QS 94 lbs.
36"d x 48"w 01923QS 01924QS 01925QS 73 lbs.
36"d x 60"w 01053QS 01054QS 01055QS 87 lbs.
36"d x 72"w 01063QS 01064QS 01065QS 102 lbs.
Round Activity Tables
42" dia. 01093QS 01094QS 01095QS 60 lbs.
48" dia. 01103QS 01104QS 01105QS 75 lbs.
60" dia. 01883QS 01884QS 01885QS 112 lbs.
64 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Rectangle Activity Table
Shown in Golden Oak top with
Black edge and Black frame.
Round Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with
Navy edge and Navy frame.
Activity Table
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Square Activity Table
Shown in Wild Cherry top
with Black edge and Black
frame.
Trapezoid Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Forest
Green edge and Forest Green frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Forest Green
FRAME Forest Green
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Persian Blue
FRAME Persian Blue
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
Kidney Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with
Yellow edge and Yellow frame.
Horseshoe Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge
and Red frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Purple
FRAME Purple
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Red
FRAME Red
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Yellow
FRAME Yellow
Flower Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with
Purple edge and Purple frame.
Clover Activity Table
Shown in Forest Green top with Forest
Green edge and Forest Green frame.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Top Size 21-30"h 15-24"h 11-16"h Wt.
Trapezoid Activity Tables
30"x 30"x 30"x 60" 01133QS 01134QS 01135QS 57 lbs.
Square Activity Tables
36"d x 36"w 01073QS 01074QS 01075QS 57 lbs.
48"d x 48"w 01083QS 01084QS 01085QS 92 lbs.
Kidney Activity Tables
48"d x 72"w 01143QS 01144QS 01145QS 116 lbs.
Top Size 21-30"h 15-24"h 11-16"h Wt.
Flower Activity Tables
60" dia. 01213QS 01214QS 01215QS 104 lbs.
Clover Activity Tables
48" dia. 01203QS 01204QS 01205QS 70 lbs.
Leg Sets for Activity Tables
adjustable height 01180QS 01181QS 01184QS 10 lbs.
fixed height, 29 1 /2"h 01186QS Black only. 10 lbs.
Half Moon Activity Tables
36"d x 72"w 01153QS 01154QS 01155QS 90 lbs.
Horseshoe Activity Tables
60"d x 66"w 01933QS 01934QS 01935QS 130 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
65

HUSKY
TABLES
Rectangle Husky Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Platinum edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Intuit Sled Chairs,
and optional Intuit Stack Chairs, see pgs. 32-35.
The Better Activity Table.
With their adjustable-height work surface and
specially-designed glides, Husky Activity Tables are
ideal for elementary and high school environments.
• 1 1 /4" thick table top with high-pressure laminate surface and
backer sheet.
• 3 /8" thick bumper edge stapled in place every eight inches.
• Sturdy table legs feature upper section of 1 3 /4" diameter.
• 17-gauge steel tube with the lower section chrome plated.
• 1 1 /2" diameter, 13-gauge steel tube.
Square Husky Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Blueberry edge
and Blueberry frame.
66 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Husky Table
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Rectangle Husky Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Clementine edge
and Clementine frame. Shown with optional Husky Chairs,
Model 00805, see pg. 53.
Round Husky Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Black edge
and Black frame.
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Clementine
FRAME Clementine
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Mint
FRAME Mint
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Blueberry
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Forest Green
FRAME Forest Green
Trapezoid Husky Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Forest Green edge
and Forest Green frame.
Kidney Husky Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Charcoal edge and
Champagne frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Purple
FRAME Purple
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Red
FRAME Red
Clover Husky Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and Mint
frame. Shown with optional Husky Chairs, Model
00807, see pg. 53.
Flower Husky Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Purple edge and
Purple frame. Shown with optional Husky Chairs,
Model 00808, see pg. 53.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Top Size 21-30"h 15-24"h Wt.
Rectangle Husky Activity Tables
24"d x 60"w 04300QS 04301QS 66 lbs.
30"d x 48"w 04305QS 04306QS 66 lbs.
30"d x 60"w 04310QS 04311QS 79 lbs.
30"d x 72"w 04320QS 04321QS 91 lbs.
36"d x 72"w 04360QS 04361QS 106 lbs.
Trapezoid Husky Activity Table
30"d x 60"w 04350QS 04351QS 61 lbs.
Round Husky Activity Tables
42" dia. 04325QS 04326QS 66 lbs.
48" dia. 04330QS 04331QS 79 lbs.
60" dia. 04335QS 04336QS 116 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Top Size 21-30"h 15-24"h Wt.
Square Husky Activity Table
48"d x 48"w 04370QS 04371QS 96 lbs.
Kidney Husky Activity Table
48"d x 72"w 04340QS 04341QS 120 lbs.
Clover Husky Activity Table
48" dia. 04380QS 04381QS 76 lbs.
Flower Husky Activity Table
60" dia. 04390QS 04391QS 110 lbs.
Husky is protected by US patents.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
67

Combining a contemporary look and wide range
of functionalities.
Schools immediately embraced our
Interchange line of classroom furniture. By
its very breadth, the line offered schools of all
kinds a great solution. Whether it’s a traditional
curriculum, cooperative learning, the Harkness
Method, or distance learning, the option you’re
seeking exists within the line.
This broad spectrum of applicability isn’t the only
evidence of the contemporary influences on the
Interchange line. No, a glance at the graceful leg
sets and finish and color options reveals the
Interchange line’s recent introduction.
Designed for today’s and tomorrow’s classrooms,
the Interchange line offers both beauty and
practical performance together with Smith
System durability.
68

INTERCHANGE
69

INTERCHANGE 3-2-1 DESK classroom
by DesignU
An active classroom design with the flexibility to accommodate 28 students engaged in group work, individual study
and lectures.
The unique Interchange 3-2-1 Desks can be positioned and repositioned throughout the day for groups of up to
six, depending on the lesson plan.
To explore alternate floor plans with this furniture, visit DesignU at SmithSystem.com
3-2-1 DESK
Highly versatile desk
allows both group and
individual work.
BRILLIANT CHAIR
Durable, ergonomic and
lightweight; an ideal chair
for active classrooms.
BOARDROOM HALF
CIRCLE TABLE
Allows individual or smallgroup
work.
BRILLIANT
ADJUSTABLE CHAIR
Offering comfort,
stability and mobility.
ACROBAT CONTOUR
TEACHER DESK
For ample workspace and
one-on-one interaction.
DELUXE TABLE TOP
LECTERN
Transforms a desktop
into a lecture space.
SIX SLOPE-SHELF
BOOKTRUCK
Holds and transports
books and media.
SINGLE-FACE SHELVING
A flexible and popular
storage option.
70

INTERCHANGE CLASSROOM itemized
model quantity description
03010 14 3-2-1 Desk (Wild Cherry/Black/Black)
11871 28 Brilliant Stack Chair (Black)
04203 1 Boardroom Half Circle Table (Wild Cherry/Black/Black)
11811 3 Brilliant Adjustable Chair (Black)
26203 1 Contour Instructor Desk (Wild Cherry/Black/Black)
04619 1 Tabletop Lectern (Black)
21001 1 Booktruck, six slope (Burgundy)
22731 1 72"h Single-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) Shelves: 5 flat, 4 adj. periodical
22741 2 72"h Single-Face Shelf - Adder (Charcoal) Shelves: 5 flat, 4 adj. periodical
23652 2 72"h Single-Face End Panels (Wild Cherry)
23415 2 End Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
23411 1 Intermediate Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
71

INTERCHANGE
OPEN FRONT DESK
Interchange Open Front Rectangle Desk (20"x27")
Model 04500V
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Black edge and Black frame.
Includes a pencil retainer. Shown with optional Astute Chair,
see pg. 48.
ROOM TO WORK INDIVIDUALLY OR IN TEAMS.
Smith System designers continue to update our Interchange line of
desking with a new option that combines the spacious flexibility of
our Interchange Student Desks with the convenience of built-in
Bookboxes. Available in one- and two-student models, Interchange
Open Front Desks provide ample work space for projects and
classroom work of all kinds.
• Interchange Open Front Desks are standard 3 /4" top with Bullet
T-Mold edge.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart, right).
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Chrome-plated lower legs of 16-gauge steel resist scuffing.
• Sock-style glide caps add protection.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
72 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Interchange Open Front Rectangle Desk (24"x48")
Model 04502V
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Black edge and Black
frame. Includes a welded partition and 2 pencil retainers.

Interchange Open Front Diamond Desk
Model 04504V
Shown in circle grouping. Shown in Grey Mesh top with
Apple edge and Platinum frame. Shown with optional
Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
Interchange Open Front Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP
Fusion MapleQS
EDGE
Black or Platinum
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
Single-Student Diamond Desk
TOP
Golden OakQS
EDGE
Black
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
OPEN FRONT DIAMOND DESK
Smith System designers continue to update the latest
generation of cooperative learning desks with the new
Interchange Open Front Diamond Desk. It offers all the
flexibility needed for cooperative learning with the
added convenience of an integrated Bookbox.
Model Size Wt.
Single-Student Open Front Rectangle Desk
04500VQS 20"d x 27"w x 21 1 /2-31 1 /2"h 37 lbs.
04501VQS 18"d x 24"w x 21 1 /2-31 1 /2"h 33 lbs.
Two-Student Open Front Rectangle Desk
04502VQS 24"d x 48"w x 21 1 /2-31 1 /2"h 52 lbs.
Interchange Open Front Diamond Desk*
04504VQS 30"d x 34"w x 21 1 /2-31 1 /2"h 36 lbs.
*Top & Edge Choice 2 & 4 are not available on Diamond Desk.
Seats 6
TOP
Grey NebulaQS
EDGE
Blueberry
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
TOP
Wild CherryQS
EDGE
Black
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Interchange Open Front Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 6 is standard on Interchange Open Front Desks.
Bookboxes are standard on all Interchange Open Front Desks
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
73

INTERCHANGE
OPEN FRONT WING DESK
Interchange Open Front Wing Desk
Model 04503G
Shown in circle grouping. Shown in Grey Mesh top with
Persian Blue edge and Platinum frame. Standard with
Steel Bookbox (choose Black or Platinum).
Shown with optional Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
DISTINCTIVE SHAPE, FLEXIBILITY AND FUNCTIONALITY.
Smith System designers continue to update our Interchange line
of desking with a new option with the versatility to promote both
individual and group work. It helps the student work alone by
providing stable, ample workspace. It helps students work
together by creating groups of four in a close space. For
durability, Interchange Wing Desks offer:
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, with
a high-pressure laminate surface.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Chrome-plated lower legs of 16-gauge steel resist scuffing.
• Sock-style glide caps add protection.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on
uneven floors.
74 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Interchange Wing Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 6 is standard on Interchange Wing Desks.

Arrange Interchange Wing Desks in a row for
lectures, testing or individual work.
Interchange Wing Desk
Model 03095G
Shown in groupings. Shown in Grey Mesh top with
Persian Blue edge and Platinum frame. Shown with
optional Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
The unique shape of Interchange Wing
Desks allows you to oppose
desks in a compact area.
Interchange Open Front Wing
& Wing Desk Popular Color Choices
TOP
Fusion MapleQS
EDGE
Black or Platinum
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
Interchange Wing Desks permit creative
arrangements in compact areas, enabling small group work.
Model Size Wt.
Interchange Wing Open Front Desk (Bookbox included*)
04503VQS 30"d x 30"w x 21 1 /2-31 1 /2"h 35 lbs.
*Choose Black or Platinum.
TOP
Golden OakQS
EDGE
Black
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
TOP
Grey NebulaQS
EDGE
Blueberry
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
Interchange Wing Desk
03095VQS 30"d x 30"w x 21 1 /2-31 1 /2"h 35 lbs.
TOP
Wild CherryQS
EDGE
Black
FRAME/BOOKBOX Black or Platinum
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
75

INTERCHANGE
DIAMOND DESK
Two-Student Interchange Diamond Desk Model 03081G
Shown in Grey Mesh top with Persian Blue edge and Platinum frame.
Shown with optional Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
COOPERATIVE LEARNING VERSION 2.0.
The design of our Interchange Diamond Desks allows them to be
grouped in space-efficient clusters of up to six. This flexibility makes
them applicable in the widest variety of curricula and helps “futureproof”
the classroom. Their innovations include a student-friendly leg
design that eliminates leg braces that can pinch fingers.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, with a
high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available
(see chart).
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Chrome-plated lower legs of 16-gauge steel resist scuffing.
• Sock-style glide caps add protection.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
• Adjustable desk height, from 21"-30" in 1" increments. Only three
(not four) legs to adjust on Single-Student Diamond Desk.
Interchange Diamond Desk Model 03080
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Clementine edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chair,
see pg. 32.
76 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Interchange Diamond Desk protected by patents pending.

The Interchange Diamond
Desk arranges in rows for
individual learning and
testing.
Students can work in
groups from two up to six
thanks to the flexibility of
Interchange Diamond
Desks. Shown with optional
Brilliant Chair in Navy,
Model 11870, see pg. 46.
Mobile Bookbox Model 21085
Platinum powdercoat finish.
14"d x 22"w x 24"h. Wt. 23 lbs.
Group six Interchange
Diamond Desks together
for group work. Shown in
Grey Nebula top, Platinum
edge, Platinum frame with
optional Viking Chair, see
pg. 51.
Thanks to the distinctive
diamond shape of the
desktops, the six-desk
group is only 75 5 /8" in
diameter.
For smaller group work,
arrange Interchange
Diamond Desks in a partial
circle. The Interchange
Diamond Desk adapts to
the lesson plan to make
learning more effective.
Single-Student Diamond Desk
Seats 6
Diamond Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt.
Interchange Diamond Desk
03080QS 30"d x 34"w x 21-30"h 45 lbs.
Two-Student Interchange Diamond Desk
03081QS 34"d x 60"w x 21-30"h 78 lbs.
Interchange Diamond Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet Edge V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Interchange Diamond Desks.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Two-Student Diamond Desk
Seats 6
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
77

3-2-1 LS
DESK
3-2-1 LS Desk Model 03010
Shown in New Age Oak top with Fuchsia edge; Apple edge;
Persian Blue edge and all with Platinum frames. Shown with
optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 33.
Understanding the Needs of Cooperative Learning Environments.
The distinctive shape of the 3-2-1 LS Desk allows the desks to be
arranged to fit the day's lesson plan. For a lecture or testing, 3-2-1 LS
Desks can be lined up in rows; for group work, the desks can be
arranged in partial and full circles. These configurations encourage
students to participate and ultimately foster cooperative learning.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, with a
high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Chrome-plated lower legs of 16-gauge steel resist scuffing.
• Sock-style glide caps add protection.
3-2-1 LS Desk Model 03010
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Mint edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chairs, see pg. 33.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
3-2-1 Student Desk protected by patents pending.
• Adjustable desk height in 1" increments.
78 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

The 3-2-1 Desk is so versatile, two students can sit at one in three different ways:
on the rounded side, along the straight edges, or facing.
3-2-1 Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
The 3-2-1 LS (large surface) Desk allows two
students to discuss lessons.
The 3-2-1 LS Desks arranged for small-group work.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
The 3-2-1 LS Desks arranged for a lecture or testing.
3-2-1 LS Desk group
Model Size Wt.
3-2-1 LS Desk
Adapted for grade 3 through adult cooperative learning classrooms.
03010QS 35"d x 50"w x 21-30"h 67 lbs.
Personal Book Cart
21085QS 14"d x 22"w x 24"h 23 lbs.
Interchange 3-2-1 LS Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Interchange 3-2-1 Desks.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
24"h
Personal Book Cart Model 21085
2" casters. Shown in Platinum.
Other color choices: Black or Champagne
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
79

BOARDROOM
TABLE
Boardroom 16-Student Table
Consists of two, Model 04203 Half Circles; two, Model
04200 Bow; two, Model 04201 Left-hand and two,
Model 04202 Right-hand. Shown with Fusion Maple
top with Blueberry edge and Champagne frame.
Shown with optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
ENGAGE YOUR STUDENTS EXECUTIVE STYLE.
Boardroom Tables come in four different
shapes that come together to form one
large conference table for 12 to 16 students.
When combined, the different shapes offer
improved sightlines and permit eye contact
for all students around the table. This
encourages students to participate and
fosters cooperative learning. Boardroom
Tables accommodate students from lower
grades through adult. Boardroom Tables
are also excellent for the Harkness Method
of teaching.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all with a
high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Chrome-plated lower legs of 16-gauge steel resist scuffing.
• Sock-style glide caps add protection.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
• Adjustable desk height, from 22"-34" in 1" increments.
80 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Bow Top Model 04200
Shown with Fusion Maple top with Blueberry
edge and Champagne frame. Shown with
optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
Slant LH Top Model 04201
& Slant RH Top Model 04202
Shown with Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Viking Chairs,
see pg. 51.
Boardroom Table
Popular Color Choices
Circle Top Model 04203
Consists of two, Model 04203 Half Circles.
Shown with Fusion Maple top with Blueberry
edge and Champagne frame. Shown with
optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
Boardroom Table Group
Consists of Model 04203 Half Circle, 04201 Slant Lefthand
and 04202 Slant Right-hand. Shown with Fusion
Maple top with Blueberry edge and Champagne
frame. Shown with optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Boardroom 12-Student Table
Consists of two, Model 04203 Half Circles;
Model 04201 Left-hand and two Model 04202
Right-hand. Shown with Fusion Maple top with
Blueberry edge and Champagne frame. Shown with
optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Type Size Wt.
04200QS Bow Top 36"d x 54"w x 22"-34"h 99 lbs.
04201QS Slant LH Top 32"d x 54"w x 22"-34"h 95 lbs.
04202QS Slant RH Top 32"d x 54"w x 22"-34"h 95 lbs.
04203QS Half Circle Top 30"d x 54"w x 22"-34"h 79 lbs.
Boardroom Tables are protected by patents pending.
Interchange Boardroom Tables Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Interchange Boardroom Tables.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
81

INTERCHANGE
ACTIVITY TABLE
Rectangle Interchange Activity Table Model 04118V
Shown in Grey Mesh top with Apple edge and Platinum frame.
Shown with optional Flavors Chairs, see pg. 26.
Classroom Activity Table.
With Rectangle, Trapezoid, Round, Square, Kidney, Half Moon and
Contour tabletops available, our Interchange Activity Tables can be a
functional and distinctive addition to a wide range of educational
environments. Interchange Activity Tables have a unique leg design
that allows more leg room and eliminates finger pinching. Assembly
and height adjustments are fast and easy.
• Rugged frame of 1" x 2" 14-gauge steel tube cross supports
welded to 16-gauge elliptical tubes.
• Unique telescoping elliptical tube leg of 16-gauge steel
adjusts eight in 1" increments.
• 14-gauge cross brace along the length of the table reinforces
the strength of the table legs.
Optional Interchange Rectangle Modesty Panel
Model 17201 for 36"w table
Model 17202 for 48"w table
Model 17203 for 60"w table
Model 17204 for 72"w table
Model 17205 for 90"w table
82 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

24", 30" and 36" deep
models have one center
support channel that is
2" x 3" wide 14-gauge
steel, with 11-gauge steel
endplates for maximum
stability. 42" and 48"
deep models have two
center supports.
Model Size Wt.
24" deep Rectangle Interchange
04100QS 24"d x 36"w x 22-34"h 68 lbs.
04101QS 24"d x 48"w x 22-34"h 82 lbs.
04131QS 24"d x 54"w x 22-34"h 87 lbs.
04102QS 24"d x 60"w x 22-34"h 92 lbs.
04103QS 24"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 107 lbs.
04104QS 24"d x 90"w x 22-34"h 122 lbs.
30" deep Rectangle Interchange
04105QS 30"d x 36"w x 22-34"h 78 lbs.
04106QS 30"d x 48"w x 22-34"h 92 lbs.
04107QS 30"d x 60"w x 22-34"h 106 lbs.
04108QS 30"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 122 lbs.
04109QS 30"d x 90"w x 22-34"h 139 lbs.
36" deep Rectangle Interchange
04111QS 36"d x 48"w x 22-34"h 104 lbs.
04112QS 36"d x 60"w x 22-34"h 120 lbs.
04113QS 36"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 137 lbs.
04114QS 36"d x 90"w x 22-34"h 160 lbs.
42" deep Rectangle Interchange
04116QS 42"d x 60"w x 22-34"h 145 lbs.
04117QS 42"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 165 lbs.
04118QS 42"d x 90"w x 22-34"h 197 lbs.
48" deep Rectangle Interchange
04121QS 48"d x 60"w x 22-34"h 161 lbs.
04122QS 48"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 183 lbs.
04123QS 48"d x 90"w x 22-34"h 217 lbs.
Round Interchange Activity Table
Model 04125
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Platinum
edge and Platinum frame. Shown with
optional Viking chairs, see pg. 51.
Trapezoid Interchange Activity Table
Model 04127
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge and
Platinum frame.
Activity Table
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Square Interchange
04110QS 36"d x 36"w x 22-34"h 85 lbs.
04115QS 42"d x 42"w x 22-34"h 106 lbs.
04119QS 48"d x 48"w x 22-34"h 133 lbs.
Round Interchange - choice 2 & 4 not available
04124QS 42"dia. x 22-34"h 88 lbs.
04125QS 48"dia. x 22-34"h 100 lbs.
04126QS 60"dia. x 22-34"h 150 lbs.
Trapezoid Interchange - choice 2 & 4 not available
04127QS 30"d x 60"w x 22-34"h 92 lbs.
Half Moon Interchange - choice 2 & 4 not available
04128QS 36"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 104 lbs.
Contour Interchange - choice 2 & 4 not available
04129QS 36"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 124 lbs.
Half Moon Interchange Activity Table
Model 04128
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Purple
edge and Champagne frame.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Interchange Activity Tables Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Interchange Activity Tables.
Kidney Interchange - choice 2 & 4 not available
04130QS 48"d x 72"w x 22-34"h 175 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Interchange Activity Table protected by
patents pending.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
83

INTERCHANGE
SCIENCE & ART TABLE
Rectangle Interchange Art Table Model 04103V
Shown in Blond Echo top with Persian Blue edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Brilliant Chairs, see pg. 47.
Bringing Art to the Science Lab, Science to the Art Studio.
Its design brings beauty to the science lab and its 400-lb.
capacity makes it a scientific choice for the studio.
Available with either a high-pressure laminate surface or
a Trespa TopLab Plus surface, the Interchange Science & Art
Table has the durability to stand up to experiments and art
projects of all kinds.
• Rugged frame of 1" x 2" 14-gauge steel tube cross
supports welded to 16-gauge elliptical tubes.
• Unique telescoping elliptical tube leg of 16-gauge
steel adjusts eight in 1" increments.
• 14-gauge cross brace along the length of the table
reinforces the strength of the table legs.
Model Size Wt.
Interchange Science & Art Tables
Laminate top — 1 1 /4" thick with vinyl bumper edge
04101QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 82 lbs.
04131QS 24"d x 54"w x 24-34"h 87 lbs.
04102QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 92 lbs.
04103QS 24"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 107 lbs.
04116QS 42"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 82 lbs.
04117QS 42"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 82 lbs.
04118QS 42"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 82 lbs.
24", 30" and 36" deep models have one center support channel that is
2" x 3" wide 14-gauge steel, with 11-gauge steel endplates for maximum
stability. 42" and 48" deep models have two center supports.
84 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

DRAWER CABINETS
With locks and 2"h
drawers. Color Choices:
Black or Champagne.
Science Table
Popular Color Choices
6 Drawer Cabinet
21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 22"h
Wt. 54 lbs.
Model 09350QS
12 Drawer Cabinet
21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 39"h
Wt. 104 lbs.
Model 09450QS
LAMINATE TOP
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TRESPA TopLab PLUS
TOP Black
EDGE Black
FRAME Platinum or Black
Interchange Trespa TopLab Plus Science Table Model 04102T
Shown in Grey Trespa TopLab Plus.
TOP Grey
EDGE Black
FRAME Platinum or Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
THE LOGICAL SCIENCE TABLE.
An objective look at the Interchange Science Table reveals
why it is the best choice for science labs. It is built to
support up to 400 lbs. of books and apparatus. It offers
the durability of a Trespa TopLab Plus surface. And it
offers stability thanks to its leveling glides.
Model Size Wt.
Trespa TopLab Plus Science Tables
04101T 24"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 82 lbs.
04131T 24"d x 54"w x 24-34"h 87 lbs.
04102T 24"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 92 lbs.
04103T 24"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 107 lbs.
Interchange Science & Art Tables Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 86 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Interchange Science & Art Tables.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
85

INTERCHANGE
ACCESSORIES
F
CHOICE 1
CHOICE 2
Bumper
T-Mold
3mm Edge
E
G
V
CHOICE 4
CHOICE 5
CHOICE 6
3mm Edge
3mm T-Mold
Bullet T-Mold
WHAT’S YOUR PROFILE?
Now available in 3 /4" and 1 1 /4" thicknesses, Smith
System tables and desktops give you the option
of lending the room a light or substantial feel.
Similarly, our edge band treatments give the
choice of crisp, clean 90-degree angles, or the
curved, gentle profile of bullet or bumper edges.
H
3mm T-Mold
CHOICE 3
MOBILE DRAWER PEDESTAL
Cabinets have steel welded construction with rounded corners and
gang lock. Drawers have flush pulls and ball bearing race slides.
All mobile units have 2" dual wheel casters. Colors: Champagne,
Platinum, Black or Navy.
22"d x 15 1 /2"w x 24 1 /2"h, Wt. 50 lbs.
MOBILE BOOKBOX
Color Choices: Black,
Champagne or Platinum.
14"d x 22"w x 24"h Wt. 23 lbs.
Model 21085QS
File/File
Model 19172QS
Box/Box/File
Model 19173QS
86

TILT MOUNT
Wt. 6 lbs.
Model 17350 QS
TILT & SWIVEL
MOUNT
Wt. 7 lbs.
Model 17351QS
FLAT-PANEL
MONITOR
MOUNTS
FOR DESKS
AND TABLES
Height adjustable
to optimize user
ergonomics, choose
either Bolt-On or
Clamp-On models,
with or without
swing arms.
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 8 lbs.
Model 17352QS
SPRING LOADED
MOUNT
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17655 PLTQS
CLAMP STYLE
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17353QS
87

Strength and stability for every kind of classroom
and lab.
Upon viewing the construction of the Planner
line, it’s tempting (but legally indefensible) to use
terms like “indestructible” or “earthquake-proof.”
How else to describe the result of the weldedsteel
leg sets, reinforced with modesty panels,
with a leg positioned at each corner? Old reliable
adjectives like “sturdy,” “rugged,” or “durable” just
aren’t up to the job.
The best thing about the robust nature of the
Planner line is that it can be used in the whole
spectrum of classrooms and curricula. Traditional
classrooms, cooperative learning classrooms,
computer labs, science labs and distance learning
labs can all be amply outfitted with choices from
the Planner line.
88

PLANNER
89

PLANNER classroom/lab
by DesignU
Designed to handle up to 58 students, this lab is suited for individual and small group work.
By changing the orientation of the two-student Planner Lab Stations, this room can be transformed into a
model Distance Learning lab. The Planner Trapezoid activity tables in the middle of the lab allow individual and small
group work.
To explore alternate floor plans using this furniture, visit DesignU at SmithSystem.com
CORNER CIRCULATION
DESK
With excellent working
space, it helps anchor
the room.
BRILLIANT ADJUSTABLE
CHAIR
Offering comfort, stability
and mobility.
PLANNER ACCESS
Known for stability, it also
offers a wireway to control
cabling.
90
PLANNER WORK CENTER
Reinforced for great strength
and stability.
INTUIT CHAIR
Its generous proportions help
students stay comfortable
and focused.
SINGLE-FACE SHELVING
Efficient, flexible storage
for a variety of media.

PLANNER CLASSROOM itemized
model quantity description
26672 1 Corner Circulation Desk (Golden Oak/Champagne/Champagne)
11811 1 Brilliant Adjustable Chair (Burgundy)
11145 20 Planner Access Station 72” wide (Golden Oak/Black/Black)
24580 6 Planner Work Center (Golden Oak/Black/Black)
00510 58 Intuit Stack Chair (Burgundy)
22738 1 72"h Single-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) Shelves: 1 flat base, 4 adj. flat
22748 2 72"h Single-Face Shelf - Adder (Charcoal) Shelves: 1 flat base, 4 adj. flat
23652 2 72"h Single-Face End Panels (Golden Oak)
23415 2 End Unit Top (Golden Oak)
23411 1 Intermediate Unit Top (Golden Oak)
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
91

PLANNER
SINGLE-STUDENT DESK
20" x 27" Planner Student Desk Model 01272V
Shown in Blond Echo top/Persian Blue edge and Platinum frame.
Shown with optional EW Tote Tray & Housing, Model 30926.
Shown with optional Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
SPACIOUS AND STRONG STUDENT DESK.
Sturdy, stable Planner Student Desks are designed to accommodate
loads of up to 200 lbs. thanks to their signature “H” Frame construction
and substantial desktop. Box-welded modesty panels of 16-gauge steel
add even more rigidity.
• Patented backpack peg that keeps student items
organized can be positioned inside or outside of
either leg.
Optional EW Tote Tray slides out
for easy access to materials.
Planner Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2
• Adjustable desk height, from 22"-32" in 1" increments.
- 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
/4" thickness, all Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
with a high-pressure laminate surface.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart). Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
• Steel front panel that adds stability.
*Choice 1 is standard on Planner Desks.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
92 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Side Bookbox / Laptop Holder
For models 36" wide minimum.
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne & Platinum.
Model 17194QS
12”d x 8”w x 16”h Wt. 10 lbs.
Single-Student Planner Desk Model 01272
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Steel Bookbox, Model 17190.
Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 32.
2" Dual-Wheel
Caster Pack
(for wheel barrow mobility)
2" one locking, set of 2.
Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 17549QS
Planner Desk Model 01274
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Make mobile with optional 2" casters,
Model 17549. Shown with optional Side Bookbox,
Model 17194.
Hard Plastic Top
Desk color offerings:
Top
Cherry
Maple
Oak
Grey
Sand
Hard Plastic Top Planner Desk Model 01273
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Black frame.
Shown with optional Steel Bookbox, Model 17190.
Shown with optional Viking Chair, see pg. 51.
Frame
Black
Platinum
Champagne
Navy
Champagne
Hard Plastic Top Planner Desk Model 01291
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne frame.
Make mobile with optional 2" casters, Model 17549.
Shown with optional Viking Chair, see pg. 51.
Planner Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Steel Bookbox
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne & Platinum.
Model 17190QS
15"d x 20"w x 4"h Wt. 8 lbs.
Wire Bookbox
Black powdercoat finish.
Model 17200QS
15"d x 18"w x 4"h Wt. 5 lbs.
EW Tote Tray
w/Housing (optional)
Tote Tray pulls out on rails for easy
access to materials.
Model 30926QS
16 5 /8"d x 18 3 /8"w x 3"h Wt. 5 lbs.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt.
20" deep, Single-Student Desk
01272QS 20"d x 27"w x 22-32"h 36 lbs.
01274QS 20"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 42 lbs.
20" deep, Single-Student Desk. Hard Plastic Top
01273 20"d x 27"w x 22-32"h 36 lbs.
01291 20"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 42 lbs.
24" deep, Single-Student Desk
01285QS 24"d x 27"w x 22-32"h 42 lbs.
01286QS 24"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 50 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
93

PLANNER
TWO & THREE STUDENT DESKS
Three-Student Planner Desk Model 01295
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Persian Blue edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Flavors Chair,
see pg. 26.
MULTIPLE CHOICES FOR MULTIPLE STUDENTS.
Our Two-Student and Three-Student Planner Desks provide plenty of
strength and stability for multiple students and their work thanks to
beefy frames of 1" x 2", 14-gauge steel tube cross supports welded to
11-gauge steel mounting plate and 1 1 /4" square, 14-gauge steel legs.
The multiple choices are between 3 /4" and 1 1 /4" thick desktops,
numerous work surface finishes as well as bumper edge shapes
and colors, and leg colors.
• Patented backpack peg that keeps student items organized.
• High-pressure laminate surface resists wear.
• Choose from several edge treatments.
• Desktop height adjusts 22" to 32" in 1" increments, meets
ADA requirements.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
94 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Two-Student Planner Desk Model 01280F
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and
Navy frame. Shown with two optional Steel
Bookboxes, Model 17190.

Two-Student Planner Desk Model 01290
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Burgundy edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Adjustable
Brilliant Chairs, see pg 46.
Planner Desk Locker Model 19155
Shown in Platinum. Shown mounted to 24" x 48" Planner
Desk. Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 33.
Accessories
Steel Bookbox
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne &
Platinum.
Model 17190QS
15"d x 20"w x 4"h Wt. 8 lbs.
Planner Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Two-Student Planner Desk Model 01276F
Shown in Golden Oak top with Black edge and Black
frame. Shown with optional Astute Chairs, see pg. 48.
Wire Bookbox
Black powdercoat finish.
Model 17200QS
15"d x 18"w x 4"h Wt. 5 lbs.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Model Size Wt.
20" deep, Two-Student Desk
01276QS 20"d x 48"w x 22-32"h 50 lbs.
01278QS 20"d x 54"w x 22-32"h 54 lbs.
01280QS 20"d x 60"w x 22-32"h 58 lbs.
01284QS 20"d x 72"w x 22-32"h 72 lbs.
20" deep, Three-Student Desk
01295QS 20"d x 84"w x 22-32"h 86 lbs.
24" deep, Two-Student Desk
01287QS 24"d x 48"w x 22-32"h 61 lbs.
01288QS 24"d x 54"w x 22-32"h 67 lbs.
01289QS 24"d x 60"w x 22-32"h 71 lbs.
01290QS 24"d x 72"w x 22-32"h 83 lbs.
24" deep, Three-Student Desk
01296QS 24"d x 84"w x 22-32"h 98 lbs.
Planner Desk Locker — available in Platinum only.
19155 17”d x 13.5”w x 20”h 20 lbs.
Has one adjustable shelf and grommet hole.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Planner Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Planner Desks.
Choice 4-6 are not available on 72"w & 84"w Planner Desks.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
95

HUDDLE
STUDENT DESK
Huddle-6 Student Desk Model 01265
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Steel Bookbox,
Model 17015. Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 32.
Huddle-8 LS Student Desk Model 01267
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Clementine
edge and Champagne frame. Shown with
optional Bookbox, Model 17016. Shown with
optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 32.
Designed for Team Learning.
Ideally suited for interactive and group learning,
the Huddle Desk has a unique trapezoid shape,
developed expressly for flexible, contemporary
classrooms. This desk allows the educator to
create and re-create classroom layouts
throughout the day, depending on the lesson
plan. Its size makes it easy to accommodate
more students in the classroom. It offers the
durability and functionality you expect from a
Smith System desk with features like:
Huddle-6 and Huddle-8 Desks are recommended for
grades K through 5. For upper grades use Huddle-8 LS
Desks or see the Arc Desk, (pg.132) or Diamond (pg. 77).
• Patented backpack peg that keeps student items organized,
can be positioned inside or outside of either leg.
• Adjustable desk height, from 22"-32" in 1" increments.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all with
a high-pressure laminate surface.
• Steel front panel that adds stability.
• “H” Frame construction adds strength.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Welded-end leg sets that don’t shimmy or rock.
96 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

How to use the Huddle-6 Desk
Face-to-Face
Side-by-Side
Half-Circle
6-Student — Full 6' dia. circle
How to use the Huddle-8 Desk
Single
Side-by-Side
Half-Circle
8-Student — Full 7' dia. circle
Huddle Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
This configuration of
Huddle-6 Desks
is 6' in diameter.
This configuration of
Huddle-8 Desks
is 7' in diameter.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Huddle-6 (top down view) Huddle-8 (top down view) Huddle-8LS (top down view)
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt.
Huddle-6 Desk
01265QS 18"d x 30"w x 22-32"h 35 lbs.
Huddle-8 Desk
01266QS 18"d x 30"w x 22-32"h 36 lbs.
Huddle-8 LS Desk (Large Surface)
01267QS 24"d x 30"w x 22-32"h 42 lbs.
Steel Bookbox* for Huddle-6 (01265)
17015QS 15"d x 21"w front, 6" rear 6 lbs.
Steel Bookbox* for Huddle-8 (01267 and 01266)
17016QS 15"d x 21"w front, 10" rear 6 lbs.
*Black powdercoat finish. Special order Champagne & Platinum.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Huddle Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Huddle Desks.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
97

PLANNER STUDENT OFFICE
& PRESENTATION BOARD
Planner Desk Model 01287
Shown with optional Flat Panel Monitor Mount,
Model 17353 and optional Keyboard Tray,
Model 17620 (see pg. 120).
Planner Desk Locker Model 19155
Platinum. Shown mounted to 24" x 48" Planner Desk.
Glides and casters standard for a free standing
Locker. Order Top separately.
Secure valuables in this steel
locker, featuring an adjustable
shelf and grommet-ringed
access port. Surface protected
with platinum powdercoat
finish.
For Planner Student Desk
and Top Shelf colors
choices, see pgs. 94-95.
Model Size Wt.
Planner Student Desk
01276QS 20"d x 48"w x 22-32"h 50 lbs.
01287QS 24"d x 48"w x 22-32"h 61 lbs.
Planner Desk Locker — available in Platinum only.
19155 17"d x 13.5"w x 20"h 20 lbs.
Has one adjustable shelf and grommet hole. Casters standard.
Optional Top — if not attaching to desk.
78099E 17"d x 13.5"w 14 lbs.
98 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Flat Panel Monitor Mount — available in Platinum only.
17353 Clamp Style 11 lbs.

Shown with optional Hard Plastic Top Planner
Student Desk, see pg. 96 and optional Intuit Chair,
see pg. 32.
T-shape Presentation Board has cork board
on one side and magnetic porcelain white
board on three sides. With three surfaces
available, three separate lesson plans may be
prepared ahead of class.
WHITE BOARD WHITE BOARD WHITE
BOARD WHITE BOARD
BOARD WHITE BOARD WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD WHITE BOARD
BOARD WHITE
WHITE BOARD
Small panel contains
tack board on reverse side
WHITE
WHITE
WHITE BOAR
BOARD WHITE
BOARD WHITE
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
BOARD WHITE
BOARD WHITE
62"h
55
50 "
3 4
38"
BOARD WHITE BOARD WHITE BOARD
Model Size Wt.
T-shape Presentation Board
18010QS 38"d x 50 3 /4"w x 62"h 89 lbs.
3" dual-wheel casters
with soft tread, one
locking.
WHITE
WHITE
BOARD WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD WHITE BOARD WHITE
WHITE BOARD WHITE BOARD
BOARD WHITE
WHITE BOARD
Small panel contains
tack board on reverse side
WHITE BOAR
BOARD WHITE
BOARD WHITE
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
WHITE BOARD
BOARD WHITE
BOARD WHITE
62"h
55 "
1 2
46 "
1 2
59"
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
99

PLANNER
ACTIVITY TABLE
Rectangle Planner Activity Table Model 25530
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Blueberry edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
Center support channel is 2" by 3" wide
of 14-gauge steel, with 11-gauge steel
endplates for maximum stability.
Strength and Stability.
Our Planner Activity Table can handle heavy subjects thanks to its
beefy frame of 1" x 2", 14-gauge steel tube cross supports welded
to 11-gauge steel mounting plate and 1 1 /4" square, 14-gauge steel
legs. This strength can be topped with six different shapes -
Rectangle, Square, Round, Trapezoid, Half Moon, and Contour - in
many different sizes. You can also choose from 3 /4" and 1 1 /4" thick
desktops, work surface finishes, bumper edge shapes and colors,
and leg colors.
• High-pressure laminate surface resists wear.
• Choose from several edge treatments.
• Table height adjusts 24" to 34" in 1" increments, meets
ADA requirements.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
Optional Planner Rectangle Modesty Panel
Model 17201 for 36"w table
Model 17202 for 48"w table
Model 17203 for 60"w table
Model 17204 for 72"w table
Model 17205 for 90"w table
100 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Planner Activity Table
Popular Color Choices
Rectangle Planner Activity Table Model 25570
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Viking Chairs,
see pg. 51.
Rectangle Planner Activity Table Model 25820
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Black edge and Black
frame. Shown with optional Circusline Adjustable Chairs,
see pg. 55.
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Model 17557 3" Caster/Stem Pack
For mobility choose the optional Caster Pack with
adjustable inserts. Set of 4 dual-wheel casters with soft
tread, two locking. 1" square, 12-gauge inserts allow table
to adjust from 27 3 /4" to 30 3 /4" high. For planner series.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
Breakaway Peninsula Table Model 26000
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
FRAME Black
quick ship
Champagne frame. 3" casters standard, two locking.
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Cut-out for 30" deep rectangle tables only. Shown with
optional Intuit Chairs. Top & edge choice #2 & 4 not available.
• •
• •
• •
• •
• •
Model Size Wt.
20" deep Rectangle Planner Activity Tables
25950QS 20"d x 36"w x 24-34"h 61 lbs.
25960QS 20"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 72 lbs.
25970QS 20"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 80 lbs.
25980QS 20"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 94 lbs.
25990QS 20"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 108 lbs.
24" deep Rectangle Planner Activity Tables
25800QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-34"h 67 lbs.
25810QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 80 lbs.
25820QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 90 lbs.
25830QS 24"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 105 lbs.
25840QS 24"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 122 lbs.
30" deep Rectangle Planner Activity Tables
25500QS 30"d x 36"w x 24-34"h 76 lbs.
25510QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 90 lbs.
25520QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 104 lbs.
25530QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 120 lbs.
25540QS 30"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 137 lbs.
36" deep Rectangle Planner Activity Tables
25550QS 36"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 102 lbs.
25560QS 36"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 118 lbs.
25570QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 135 lbs.
25580QS 36"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 158 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Model Size Wt.
Optional Casters (set of 4, 2 locking)
17557QS 3" casters/stem pack 68 lbs.
Breakaway Peninsula Table (3" casters included)
26000QS 48"dia. x 27-31"h 94 lbs.
Planner Activity Tables Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Planner Desks.
Green • = Low range available in 15-24"h.
Add an L following model number.
Blue • = Fixed-height leg available in 29.5"h.
Add an X following model number.
Available in Black only.
Standard lead time.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
101

PLANNER
ACTIVITY TABLE
Square Planner Activity Table
Model 25610
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Black
edge and Black frame. Shown with
optional Viking Chairs, see pg. 51.
48" Round Planner Activity Table
Model 25630
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Platinum
edge and Platinum frame. Shown with
optional Viking Chairs, See pg. 51.
Trapezoid Planner Activity Table
Model 25600
Shown in Golden Oak top with Black edge
and Black frame. Shown with optional
Intuit Sled Base Chairs, see pg. 35.
More Shapes for More Activities.
The strength and stability of Planner Activity Tables is not
limited to rectangular tables. Squares, Rounds, Trapezoids,
Half Moons and Kidneys are all built with the solid
construction long associated with Planner Activity Tables.
Model Size Wt.
Square Planner Activity Table
25610QS 48"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 133 lbs.
Round Planner Activity Tables - choice 2 & 4 not available
25620QS 42" diameter x 24-34"h 86 lbs.
25630QS 48" diameter x 24-34"h 98 lbs.
25640QS 60" diameter x 24-34"h 148 lbs.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all
with a high-pressure laminate surface.
• Rugged, 12-gauge steel lower leg is 1" sq. tubing,
chrome plated for protection.
• Strong, 14-gauge steel upper leg is 1 1 /4" sq. tubing,
protected with a durable powdercoat surface.
Planner Tables Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Planner Desks.
102 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Trapezoid Planner Activity Table - choice 2 & 4 not available
• • 25600QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 90 lbs.
Half Moon Planner Activity Table - choice 2 & 4 not available
25650QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 102 lbs.
Contour Planner Activity Table - choice 2 & 4 not available
25660QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 128 lbs.
Kidney Planner Activity Table - choice 2 & 4 not available
25665QS 48"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 149 lbs.
Green • = Low range available in 15-24"h.
Add an L following model number.
Blue • = Fixed-height leg available in 29 1 /2"h.
Add an X following model number.
Available in Black only.

36" x 36" Square Café Table
Model 01503 & 01525
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Blueberry edge
and Black sitting height base. Shown with
optional Intuit Sled Base Chairs, see pg. 35.
Café Tables
Create a Café Table
Choose your top — Square or Round
Choose your base — Sitting height or
Standing height
36" Round Café Table Model 01504 & 01536
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and
Champagne standing base. Shown with optional
Intuit Adjustable Stool, see pg. 35.
Planner & Café Table
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Model Size Wt.
Square Café Table Tops 1 1 /4" thick with 3 /8" molding
01501QS 30"d x 30"h 29 lbs.
01503QS 36"d x 36"h 42 lbs.
01505QS 42"d x 42"h 57 lbs.
Round Café Table Tops 1 1 /4" thick with 3 /8" molding
01502QS 30"diameter 25 lbs.
01504QS 36"diameter 33 lbs.
01506QS 42"diameter 45 lbs.
01507QS 48"diameter 58 lbs.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
4 point Base sitting height
01525QS 29"h 34 lbs.
4 point Base standing height
01536QS 42"h 38 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
103

PLANNER
TEACHER DESK
Planner Teacher Desk Model 24010H
Shown in Amber Cherry top with Champagne
edge and Champagne frame. Shown with optional
Tabletop Lectern, Model 00471. Also shown with
optional UXL Adjustable Chair, see pg. 39.
The New Standard for Teachers’ Desks.
Our Planner Teacher Desks are built to withstand years of use.
They’re available with suspended double or single drawer
pedestals that lock for security. The drawers feature all-welded
steel construction for durability. For maximum storage, the
drawers run full depth and are equipped with full extension ball
bearing slides for complete access and quiet operation.
• Steel front panel that adds stability.
• “H” Frame construction adds strength.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Welded-end leg sets that don’t shimmy or rock.
• Full-width pulls on drawers for easy use.
• Full-height sides on file drawers for hanging files.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all
with a high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
Planner Teacher Desk Model 24010
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Champagne edge
and Champagne frame. Shown with optional Intuit
Adjustable Chair, Model 00531.
Planner Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Planner Desks.
104 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Planner Teacher Desk Model 24000
Left-hand drawer pedestal. Shown in Maple top
with Champagne edge and Champagne frame.
Planner Teacher Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Three Sloping Shelf Truck
Model 21092
Shown in Champagne.
Intuit Adjustable Chair
Model 00531
Shown in Clementine.
Other colors available.
Anything Truck Model 21089
Two flat shelves and one top shelf
with six bins. Shown in Champagne.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
5 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt. Model Size Wt.
Planner Teacher Desk - double pedestal
Intuit Adjustable Chair
24010QS 30"d x 60"w x 29"h 168 lbs.
00530QS ‘A+’ Shell, glides, 15.5 - 21" 27 lbs.
00531QS ‘A+’ Shell, 2" casters, 15.5 - 21" 27 lbs.
Planner Teacher Desk - single pedestal
24000QS Left-hand 30"d x 48"w x 29"h 130 lbs.
24001QS Right-hand 30"d x 48"w x 29"h 130 lbs.
Three Sloping Shelf Truck
21092QS 14"d x 36"w x 43"h 60 lbs.
Planner Teacher Desk Center Drawer
17342QS 16"d x 23"w x 2.25"h 5 lbs.
Anything Truck
21089QS 18"d x 36"w x 43"h 72 lbs.
Tabletop Lectern - Dual Surface Lectern w/bolt-on swing arm
00471QS 19"d x 19"w x 6"h 22 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
105

VERTICAL FILES
& BOOKCASES
Wardrobe Cabinet Model 19175
Shown in Champagne. Also available in
Black or Platinum.
2-Drawer File
Model 19160
Shown in Champagne.
4-Drawer
File Model 19161
Shown in Champagne.
Quality and Strength are Standard Features.
The quality of our Vertical Files shines through in our attention
to detail. For security, the files have a keyed lock. For safety,
the files have an interlock system that prevents accidental
tipping caused by more than one drawer opening at a time. It
also eliminates the need for a user-activated stop-catch device.
Heavy-gauge ball-bearing slide-arm suspensions offer effortless
operation; their built-in bumpers prevent bounce back.
• Drawers have tall sides to accommodate hanging folders.
• Cabinets are fully welded 20-gauge steel with
heavy-gauge bracing for long-term use.
• Full width integral pulls increase safety and enhance
aesthetics.
• Full extension ball bearing slides allow full drawer access.
Model Size Wt.
2 Drawer File
19160 26 1 /2"d x 15"w x 28"h 75 lbs.
4 Drawer File
19161 26 1 /2"d x 15"w x 52"h 135 lbs.
Wardrobe Cabinet
19175 24"d x 24"w x 54"h 161 lbs.
106 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

5-Shelf Bookcase
Model 19166
Shown in Platinum.
4-Shelf Bookcase
Model 19165
Shown in Champagne.
2-Shelf Bookcase
Model 19164
Shown in Black.
Vertical File
Color Choices
Black
Champagne
Platinum
Bookcase
Color Choices
Long-Term Durability for a Long-Term Investment.
Fully welded Smith System Bookcases are built to last.
They feature double wall side panels for extra strength and
toughness. Their slotted inside walls allow shelves to be
adjusted in 1" increments with easy-to-use clips.
• 34 1 /2" wide bookcases are available in three heights:
29" with one adjustable shelf, 47" with three adjustable
shelves and 59" with four adjustable shelves.
• The bookcase's bends and joints are designed for
extended usefulness.
• Bookcase is fully welded 20-gauge steel.
• The shelves are constructed of 20-gauge steel with 'C'
brackets for added strength.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Black
Champagne
Platinum
Model Size Wt.
Bookcases
19164 12.5"d x 34 1 /2"w x 29"h 52 lbs.
19165 12.5"d x 34 1 /2"w x 47"h 72 lbs.
19166 12.5"d x 34 1 /2"w x 59"h 92 lbs.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
107

LECTERNS
The Dual Surface Lectern (as well as the Curl Top
Lectern) can be mounted with our Bolt-On,
or Clamp-On Mounts, both offer spring loaded,
or swing arm models. All allow height adjustment,
assuring a comfortable reading height for teacher
(see photo above) or student (see photo on right).
Optional
Personal Book Cart
Model 21085
14"d x 22"w x 24"h
For the Perfect
Presentation.
Whether you need a
mobile lectern or a
convenient tabletop
model, these versatile
pieces make a strong
statement in
classrooms, libraries,
meeting rooms and
more.
DUAL SURFACE Desktop lectern
Model 00471
Its distinctive shape allows the instructor to
reference two sources simultaneously, and
thanks to its rugged steel construction, it
can support a laptop. Mount to tabletop
with either our Clamp-On or Bolt-On Mount.
19"d x 19"w x 6"h
108 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
CURL TOP Desktop lectern
Model 00481
This strong lectern can hold large, heavy
reference materials and thanks to its curl
top design, it can hold large books open.
Mount to tabletop with either our
Clamp-On or Bolt-On Mount.
14.5"d x 19"w x 4"h
Desktop Lecterns
Color Choices
Apple
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Navy
Persian Blue
PlatinumQS
Purple
Red
White
Yellow
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
All non QS colors are special
order and subject to
standard lead times.

Projector Lectern Model 04620
Cart accommodates digital and
over-head projectors alongside its 18" x 20"
lectern that can be positioned on the right or
left. Base unit features storage shelf. 16" x 18"
projector area includes rubber mat to steady
equipment. Lectern and base have grommet
holes for routing wires. 3" dual wheel casters
add mobility (two locking).
Shown in Champagne.
Standup Lectern Model 00460
All-steel lectern features storage
compartment with 3" high opening.
Shown in Champagne.
Color Choices: Navy, Champagne
or Black.
Color Choices: Navy, Black or Champagne
Mobile Lectern Model 00502
Fully welded heavy-gauge steel with
laminate top, three storage shelves,
retaining lip on surface, grommet holes
for wires. 3" dual wheel casters for
mobility (two locking). Shown in
Champagne.
Color Choices: Black top only with
frame: Navy, Black or Champagne
Deluxe Tabletop Lectern Model 04619
Plastic laminate top with retainer and large
storage area for reference materials.
Shown in Navy.
Color Choices: Black top only with frame:
Navy, Black or Champagne
Mobile Lectern Model 04622
Box/Box/File drawers.
Lectern Model 04619 rests on
mobile drawer pedestal with 2"
casters Model 19173. Shown in
Navy.
Model Description Wt.
Dual Surface Desktop Lectern - 19"d x 19"w x 6"h (+ mount)
00470QS w/swing arm (clamp-on) 22 lbs.
00471QS w/swing arm (bolt-on) 25 lbs.
00472QS w/spring loaded swing arm (clamp-on) 23 lbs.
Curl Top Desktop Lectern - 14.5"d x 19"w x 4"h (+ mount)
00480QS w/swing arm (clamp-on) 19 lbs.
00481QS w/swing arm (bolt-on) 22 lbs.
00482QS w/spring loaded swing arm (clamp-on) 20 lbs.
Model Size Wt.
Projector Lectern
04620QS 18"d x 30"w x 42"h 95 lbs.
Mobile Lectern
00502QS 17"d x 25"w x 44"h 64 lbs.
Standup Lectern
00460QS 12.5"d x 23"w x 46"h 37 lbs.
Mobile Lectern
04622QS 20"d x 18"w x 38"h 76 lbs.
Deluxe Tabletop Lectern
04619QS 20"d x 18"w x 13"h 21 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
109

ACCESS
STATION
Two-Student Access Station Model 11145
Shown Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with two optional CPU Holders, Model 17213,
optional 3" casters, Model 17557 and optional Flat Panel
Monitor Mount, Model 17350 (see pg. 121).
Shown with optional Intuit Sled Base Chairs, see pg. 35.
Desks with Secure Wire Storage.
What's locked up stays secure — and you can count on that
with the Access Station. Unique cable ports with lift-up doors
keep wires out of sight and out of the way — and a standard
lock ensures they stay there.
Lift-up door on wireway
with key lock
Keeps wires tucked away
neatly, standard lock
ensures they stay that way.
• Chrome-plated lower legs resist scuffing.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on
uneven floors.
• Adjustable table height from 22" up to 32" in
1" increments.
• Full-length locking 6" deep door has cord cutouts,
providing easy access to wires.
Access Stations Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Access Stations.
110 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Three-Student Access Station Model 11146
Shown Grey Nebula top with Clementine edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chairs,
see pg. 33.
Single-Student Access Station
Model 11161
Optional CPU Holder, Model 17213.
Shown Fusion Maple top with
Charcoal edge and Champagne
frame. Shown with optional Brilliant
Adjustable Chair, see pg. 47.
Access Station
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Two-Student Access Station Model 11165
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Charcoal edge and Black
frame. Show with optional CPU Holders, Model 17213.
Five-Sided Corner Access Station Model 11167
Shown Golden Oak top with Black edge and Black frame.
Shown with optional Viking Chair, see pg. 51.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Model Description Width Wt.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
24" deep Access Stations with 22"-32" height range
11140QS Single-Student 30"w 56 lbs.
Model Description Width Wt.
11141QS Single-Student 36"w 63 lbs.
30" deep Access Stations with 22"-32" height range
11142QS Single-Student 42"w 70 lbs.
11160QS Single-Student 30"w 78 lbs.
11143QS Two-Student 48"w 76 lbs.
11161QS Single-Student 36"w 85 lbs.
11144QS Two-Student 60"w 93 lbs.
11162QS Single-Student 42"w 92 lbs.
11145QS Two-Student 72"w 110 lbs.
11163QS Two-Student 48"w 98 lbs.
11146QS Three-Student* 84"w 126 lbs.
11164QS Two-Student 60"w 115 lbs.
24" deep models will not accommodate adjustable keyboards
11165QS Two-Student 72"w 132 lbs.
11166QS Three-Student* 84"w 148 lbs.
11147QS Five-Sided Corner 48"w 112 lbs.
11167QS Five-Sided Corner 48"w 134 lbs.
17557QS 3" Caster/Stem Pack, set of 4 12 lbs.
Optional CPU Holder
Planner Series only.
17213QS 13"d x 7"w x 16"h 12 lbs.
Limits leg height to
*3-Student Desks (Model 11146 & Model 11166) will not accommodate 3 CPU holders. 27 3 /4" to 30 3 /4"
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
111

PLANNER
LAB
Planner Lab Model 24620
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Platinum
edge and Platinum frame. Shown with
optional Intuit Sled Base Chair, see pg. 35.
Stronger Student Workstations.
Does your school have enough Planner Labs to optimize
the e-learning environment? These lab-style desks are built
specifically for that purpose. Solid H-frame construction
ensures that these tables can support heavy equipment.
Features include adjustable-height legs, a thick bumper edge
for safety and a long-lasting, high-pressure laminate surface.
Four colors are available to complement any classroom style.
• Available in multiple lengths and widths, allowing you
to create workstations for one, two and three students.
Planner Lab Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 120 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Planner Lab.
3/4" thick tops not available on desks 48", 60", 72" or 84" wide.
• 1 1 /4" thick top with high pressure laminate surface and
3 /8" thick bumper edge molding stapled every 8".
• Cord cutout at rear of work surface. 8" high x 3" deep
wireway of 16-gauge steel with cable ports.
112 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Order a Flat
Panel Monitor
Mount! See
page 121.
Planner Lab Station Model 24510
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and Navy
frame. Shown with optional Flat Panel Monitor Mount,
Model 17350 (see page 121 to order).
Planner Lab
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Planner Lab Station Model 24560
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Charcoal edge and Black
frame. Shown with two optional CPU Holders, 17213.
Planner Lab Station Model 24540
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Charcoal edge and
Champagne frame.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Planner Lab Station Model 24610
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional: 3" casters, Model 17557;
CPU Holder, Model 17213 and Monitor Mount, Model 17350.
Corner Station Model 24600
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Charcoal
edge and Champagne frame.
Pole Leg Riser Shelf
Clamp-On Pole (Platinum only)
1 1 /4" thick top with Bumper Edge.
Model Size Wt.
24" deep Planner Lab Station
24610QS 24"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 56 lbs.
24500QS 24"d x 48"w x 22-32"h 68 lbs.
24510QS 24"d x 60"w x 22-32"h 80 lbs.
24520QS 24"d x 72"w x 22-32"h 92 lbs.
24620QS 24"d x 84"w x 22-32"h 104 lbs.
30" deep Planner Lab Station
24530QS 30"d x 30"w x 22-32"h 59 lbs.
24630QS 30"d x 36"w x 22-32"h 65 lbs.
24540QS 30"d x 48"w x 22-32"h 80 lbs.
24550QS 30"d x 60"w x 22-32"h 95 lbs.
24560QS 30"d x 72"w x 22-32"h 110 lbs.
24570QS 30"d x 84"w x 22-32"h 125 lbs.
Corner Station
24600QS Four 30" sides 114 lbs.
(front and rear 25")
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Model Size Wt.
Rectangular Riser Shelf with clamp-on pole
17666QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 29 lbs.
17667QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17668QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 45 lbs.
17669QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 51 lbs.
17677QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 73 lbs.
17679QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 94 lbs.
17557QS 3" Caster/Stem Pack, set of 4
Planner Series only.
Limits desk height to
27 3 /4" to 30 3 /4"
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
113

PLANNER
WORK CENTERS
Planner Work Center Model 24580
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Burgundy
edge and Platinum frame. Shown with optional
Flat Panel Monitor Mounts, see pg. 121.
Trapezoid Tables for Cost-Efficiency.
Work Centers comprised of two trapezoid stations are a cost-efficient
way to create lab environments that group students for Team
Learning. Strong construction allows the Planner Work Center to hold
the weight of multiple computers and student books. Use these
workstations individually or place them back to back to create cluster
work centers. For more work space, simply add optional riser shelves.
• 1 1 /4" thick top with high-pressure laminate surface and 3 /8" thick
bumper edge.
• Adjustable table height from 22" up to 32" in 1" increments.
• Legs of 1 1 /4" square, 12-gauge steel tubes with powdercoat finish.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on uneven floors.
• Chrome-plated lower legs resist scuffing.
Shown with optional Flat Panel Monitor Mounts,
Model 17350, see pg. 121.
114 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Add an Adjustable
Keyboard to any Planner
Work Center.
See page 120 to order.
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Apple edge
and Platinum frame. Shown with optional
Flavors Chairs, see pg. 26.
Trapezoid Riser Shelves
Add to the workstation's surface to increase
work space. Legs adjust in one-inch
increments.
Planner Work Center
Popular Color Choices
50”
Planner Work Center Model 24580
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Blueberry edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Intuit Sled Base
Chairs, see pg. 35.
Model Size Wt.
Trapezoid Workstation — 40" x 40" x 40" x 80"
24580QS 35"d x 80"w x 22-32"h 125 lbs.
Trapezoid Workstation — 50" x 50" x 50" x 96"
24590QS 44"d x 96"w x 22-32"h 165 lbs.
Trapezoid Riser Shelf
01792QS 21"d x 45"w x 16-20"h 48 lbs.
01790QS 26"d x 57"w x 16-20"h 63 lbs.
44”
44”
35”
35”
50”
24590
24590
26”
26” 57”
01790
96”
Riser Shelf
40”
24580 40”
01790
Riser Shelf
57”
96”
44" Deep Planner Work Center
Top View
24580 21” 01792
Riser Shelf
45”
21” 80” 01792
Riser Shelf
35" Deep Planner Work Center
Top 45” View
80”
40”
40”
50”
50”
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
115

PLANNER SCIENCE
& ART TABLE
Planner Science Table Model 25715
Shown in Grey Trespa TopLab Plus and Platinum frame.
Shown with optional UXL Stack Chairs, see pg. 36.
6 Drawer Cabinet
Model 09350
Shown in Champagne.
Also available in Black.
Strong, Stable Science Table.
Don't experiment with science
tables. Trust the proven strength
and stability of our Science Tables.
Thanks to the robust frame and
support system, they can hold up
to 400 lbs. They’re available in a
durable laminate top or Trespa
TopLab Plus surface.
24", 30" and 36" deep models
have one center support
channel that is 2" x 3" wide
14-gauge steel, with 11-gauge
steel endplates for maximum
stability. 42" and 48" deep
models have two center
supports.
Model Size Wt.
Planner Science & Art Tables
Laminate top — 1 1 /4" thick with vinyl bumper edge
11260QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 85 lbs.
11263QS 24"d x 54"w x 24-34"h 90 lbs.
11266QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 95 lbs.
11269QS 24"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 110 lbs.
25700QS 42"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 143 lbs.
25710QS 42"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 163 lbs.
25720QS 48"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 159 lbs.
25730QS 48"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 181 lbs.
116 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Science & Art Table
Popular Color Choices
LAMINATE TOP
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Graphite NebulaQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Rectangle Art Table Model 25700
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Charcoal
edge and Champagne frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Planner Science Table Model 11266
Shown in Graphite Nebula laminate top.
Shown with optional Astute Chairs, see pg. 48.
Planner Science Table Model 11268
Shown in Trespa TopLab Plus. Grey with Platinum frame.
Shown with optional UXL Stack Chairs, see pg. 36.
TRESPA TopLab PLUS
TOP Black
EDGE Black
FRAME Black or Platinum
TOP Grey
EDGE Black
FRAME Black or Platinum
Model Size Wt.
Trespa TopLab Plus Science Tables
11262 24"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 112 lbs.
11265 24"d x 54"w x 24-34"h 122 lbs.
11268 24"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 130 lbs.
11271 24"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 152 lbs.
25705 42"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 143 lbs.
25715 42"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 163 lbs.
25725 48"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 159 lbs.
25735 48"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 181 lbs.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Rock-steady art tables.
Smith System Art Tables offer beefy construction to
stand firm under everything from heavy clay sculptures
to vigorous erasing. They boast frames of 1" x 2"
14-gauge steel tube cross supports welded to 11-gauge
steel mounting plate and 1 1 /4" square, 12-gauge steel
legs. This all supports 1 1 /4" thick work surfaces, topped
with high-pressure laminate and surrounded by 3 /8"
thick edge bumpers.
6 Drawer Cabinet, w/locks, 2"h drawers
09350QS 21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 22"h 54 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
117

GRAPHIC
ARTS TABLE
One-piece Slope Top Graphic Arts Table Model 27345
Shown in Grey top with Black edge and Black frame. Shown
with optional twelve Drawer Cabinet, Model 09450 and
optional Brilliant Adjustable Stool, see pg. 47.
Adjustable Art Tables.
Planner Graphic Arts Tables bring their sturdy construction features
to the art studio. The one-piece-top model provides a standard
adjustable incline area while the split-top model adds a flat work
area for maximum workspace.
• 3 /4" thick top with high-pressure laminate surface and flat 3mm
edge with pencil stop.
•
Adjustable top slope has a range of 0 to 45 degrees.
•
Adjustable table height (29"-39") accommodates stools.
•
Fully box-welded leg sets of 1 3 /16" x 2 1 /2" 16-gauge steel tube
with 1 1 /4" square 14-gauge steel tube legs.
The UXL Adjustable Stool
Model XL045FHPHLR
It can be raised from 23 1 /2" all the
way up to 30"h. Shown in Mint
Fabric seat and Plastic back with
left/right arms.
118 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CAD Desk Model 27344
Shown in Maple top with Champagne frame. Shown
with optional CPU Holder, Model 17213. Shown with
optional Intuit adjustable stool, see pg. 35. Shown with
optional Flat-Panel Monitor Mount, Model 17352.
Graphic Arts Table
Popular Color Choices
A rugged steel
brace holds the
tilting desktop
securely in place.
TOP CherryQS
EDGE Cherry
FRAME Black
TOP GreyQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP MapleQS
EDGE Maple
FRAME Champagne
Split-Top Graphic Arts Table Model 27346
Shown in Maple top with Champagne frame.
Shown with optional six Drawer Cabinet, Model 09350
and optional Brilliant Adjustable Chair, see pg. 47.
Order an optional Flat-Panel
Monitor Mount with swing arm,
tilt and swivel, Model 17352.
TOP OakQS
EDGE Oak
FRAME Champagne
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt. Model Size Wt.
One-piece Top Graphic Arts Table
CAD Desk
27345QS 24"d x 36"w x 29-39"h 62 lbs.
27344QS 24"d x 48"w x 29-39"h 72 lbs.
27347QS 30"d x 42"w x 29-39"h 80 lbs.
Optional Accessories for CAD Desk
Split-Top Graphic Arts Table
CPU Holder
27346QS 24"d x 36"w x 29-39"h 62 lbs.
17213QS 13"d x 7"w x 16"h 12 lbs.
27348QS 30"d x 42"w x 29-39"h 80 lbs.
Flat-Panel Monitor Mount w/ swing arm, tilt swivel
6 Drawer Cabinet, w/locks, 2"h drawers
17352QS
8 lbs.
09350QS 21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 22"h 54 lbs.
12 Drawer Cabinet, w/locks, 2"h drawers
09450QS 21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 39"h 108 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
119

PLANNER
ACCESSORIES
WHAT’S YOUR PROFILE?
Now available in 3 /4" and 1 1 /4" thicknesses, Smith
System tables and desktops give you the option
of lending the room a light or substantial feel.
Similarly, our edge band treatments give the
choice of crisp, clean 90-degree angles, or the
curved, gentle profile of bullet or bumper edges.
F
CHOICE 1
CHOICE 2
Bumper
T-Mold
3mm Edge
E
G
V
CHOICE 4
CHOICE 5
CHOICE 6
3mm Edge
3mm T-Mold
Bullet T-Mold
H
3mm T-Mold
CHOICE 3
SIDE BOOKBOX
LAPTOP HOLDER
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne
and Platinum. For models
36" wide minimum.
12"d x 8"w x 16"h Wt. 10 lbs.
Model 17194QS
CPU HOLDER
Model 17213QS
13"d x 7"w x 16"h
Wt. 12 lbs.
ADJUSTABLE KEYBOARD
Model 17620QS
17"d x 22"w x 6"h
Wt. 20 lbs.
STEEL BOOKBOX
Black powdercoat finish. Special order
Champagne and Platinum.
15"d x 20"w x 4"h Wt. 8 lbs.
Model 17190QS
WIRE BOOKBOX
Black powdercoat finish.
15"d x 18"w x 3.5"h Wt. 5 lbs.
Model 17200QS
EW TOTE TRAY WITH HOUSING
Tote Tray pulls out on rails for easy
access to materials.
16 5 /8"d x 18 3 /8"w x 3"h Wt. 5 lbs.
Model 30926QS
120

TILT MOUNT
Wt. 6 lbs.
Model 17350 QS
TILT & SWIVEL
MOUNT
Wt. 7 lbs.
Model 17351QS
FLAT-PANEL
MONITOR
MOUNTS
FOR DESKS
AND TABLES
Height adjustable
to optimize user
ergonomics, choose
either Bolt-On or
Clamp-On models,
with or without
swing arms.
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 8 lbs.
Model 17352QS
SPRING LOADED
MOUNT
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17655 PLT QS
CLAMP STYLE
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17353QS
121

29 1 /2"h FIXED HEIGHT
LEG
ADJUSTABLE LEG
WITH MOBILITY
Two choices for wheeling Planner
Tables, height adjusts in 1"
increments.
• For “wheelbarrow” mobility
(slightly lifting one end of table),
choose Set of Two 2" Dual
Wheel Casters, one locking.
Model 17549
Set at 29 1 /2", features 1"
leveling glides to assure a
steady table on uneven floors.
CHOOSE FROM
5 LEG STYLES TO
TAILOR PLANNER
DESKS OR
TABLES TO
ENVIRONMENTS
OF ALL KINDS.
• When all four legs on wheels
choose Set of Four 3” Dual
Casters, two locking, with
insert stem for each leg.
Model 17557
ADJUSTABLE LEG
Height adjusts from 24" to 34"
high in 1” increments, features 1”
leveling glides.
TALL ADJUSTABLE LEG
Order special lower leg insert
set for adjustment from 30" to
40" high. For Planner Activity
Tables.
Model 17500
SHORT ADJUSTABLE LEG
Designed for Early Childhood
use, this option allows height
adjustability from 15"-24" in
1" increments, features
1" leveling glides.
Available on select Planner
Activity Tables, pgs. 100-103.
122

PLANNER
ACCESSORIES CONT’D
PULL-OUT KNEE
DRAWER
Black molded drawer
mounts under work
surface. Molded
pencil area 19"d.
16"d x 23"w x 2"h
Model 17342QS
DRAWER CABINETS
With locks and 2"h drawers.
Color Choices: Black or Champagne.
6 Drawer Cabinet
21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 22"h
Wt. 54 lbs.
Model 09350QS
12 Drawer Cabinet
21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 39"h
Wt. 104 lbs.
Model 09450QS
MOBILE DRAWER PEDESTAL
Cabinets have steel welded construction with rounded
corners and gang lock. Drawers have flush pulls and ball
bearing race slides. All mobile units have 2" dual wheel
casters. Colors: Champagne, Platinum, Black or Navy.
22"d x 15 1 /2"w x 24 1 /2"h, Wt. 50 lbs.
POLE LEG RISER SHELF - Clamp-on Pole (Platinum only)
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17665QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 26 lbs.
17666QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 29 lbs.
17667QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17668QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 45 lbs.
17669QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 51 lbs.
17677QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 73 lbs.
17679QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 94 lbs.
17680QS 12"d x 90"w x 12"h 106 lbs.
Add a ‘V’ following Model No. to order a 3 /4" thick top
File/File
Model 19172QS
Box/Box/File
Model 19173QS
ACROBAT LEG RISER SHELF
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17645QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 31 lbs.
17646QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17647QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 39 lbs.
17648QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 50 lbs.
17649QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 56 lbs.
17657QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 78 lbs.
17659QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 99 lbs.
Add a ‘V’ following Model No. to order a 3 /4" thick top
123

Designed for dynamic classrooms and curricula
of all kinds.
More and more curricula have come to recognize
the benefits of movement during the school day.
One of the best ways to facilitate movement in the
classroom is with our Flexline furniture; it provides
unexcelled ingress and egress for students. The
desks and tables in the Flexline family achieve
easy access through advanced engineering that
achieves the stability of four legs while requiring
only two. This allows the student to swing her or
his knees out from behind the desk without
knocking against a desk leg.
The comprehensive Flexline family offers
solutions for traditional classrooms, cooperative
learning classrooms and labs. When the
curriculum calls for flexibility, great ergonomics
make Flexline a great choice.
124

FLEXLINE
125

FLEXLINE classroom
by DesignU
This classroom accommodates 28 students who can work in groups up to four or individually. Creative use of Smith
System Quick Carrels and shelving break the room into zones to focus student activity.
The Flex Desks unique ergonomics provide students easy ingress and egress, which allows easier
movement in the classroom.
To explore alternate floor plans using this furniture, visit DesignU at SmithSystem.com
ACROBAT BULLET
TEACHER DESK
For maximum stability and
ergonomics.
BRILLIANT ADJUSTABLE
CHAIR
Offering comfort, stability
and mobility.
ELEMENTAL DESK
The open front design that
elevates basic desking.
QUICK CARREL
Educators are always
finding new uses for it.
126
Planner Activity Table
Half-moon shape for small
group work.
EVERYTHING CART
To store and transport
everything from books
to manipulatives.
FLEX DESK
Easy ingress/egress.
INTUIT CHAIR
Great ergonomics.
DOUBLE-FACE
SHELVING
Flexible, efficient
classroom storage.

FLEXLINE CLASSROOM itemized
model quantity description
26516 1 Acrobat Bullet Workstation (Fusion Maple/Black/Black)
02791 2 Viking Adjustable Chair (Burgundy)
01475 3 Elemental Student Desk (Fusion Maple/Burgundy/Burgundy)
00513 34 Intuit Stack Chair (Burgundy)
18000 3 Quick Carrel White erase board/Cork board
25650 1 Planner Activity Table - Half Moon (Fusion Maple/Black/Black)
21088 1 Everything Cart (Burgundy)
01360 28 Single-Student Flex Desk (Fusion Maple/Black/Black)
17190 28 Steel Bookbox (Black)
22151 1 60"h Double-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat base, 6 adj. periodical
22161 1 60"h Double-Face Shelf - Adder (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat base, 6 adj. periodical
23537 2 60"h Double-Face End Panels (Fusion Maple)
23407 1 Double Unit Top (Fusion Maple)
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
127

SINGLE-STUDENT
FLEX DESK
Optional EW Tote Tray
w/Housing
Tote Tray pulls out on rails
for easy access to materials.
Model 30926QS
16 5 /8"d x 18 3 /8"w x 3"h Wt. 5 lbs.
Single-Student Flex Desk Model 01360
Shown in Grey Mesh top with Apple edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Flavors
Chair, see pg. 26. Shown with optional EW Tote
Tray, Model 30926.
VERSATILE CLASSROOM DESK.
Single-Student Flex Desks have an oversized
work surface that accommodates laptop
computers for project learning environments.
Add two optional casters for wheelbarrow
mobility or four for full mobility. Either way,
the Flex Desk moves as easily as you need it
while offering outstanding durability and
superior versatility thanks to features like:
• Patented backpack peg that keeps student items organized,
can be positioned inside or outside of either leg. “Y” Leg
shape allows easy ingress and egress for students.
• Adjustable desk height, from 24"-32" in 1" increments. Only
two (not four) legs to adjust.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all with a
high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Lockable endcap/glide combination that resists tampering.
Flex Desks are protected by patents.
128 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Hard Plastic Desk Top
color offerings:
Top
Cherry
Maple
Oak
Grey
Sand
Hard Plastic Top Flex Student Desk Model 01362
Shown in Cherry top with Black. Shown with optional
Steel Bookbox, Model 17190. Shown with optional Viking
Chair, see pg. 51.
Frame
Black
Platinum
Champagne
Navy
Champagne
Hard Plastic Top Flex Student Desk Model 01369
Shown with optional Quick Carrel (Model 18000),
see pg. 62.
Flex Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Single-Student Flex Desk Model 01368
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chair,
see pg. 32. Shown with optional 2" casters, Model 17552.
Optional casters add
wheelbarrow-style
mobility and can be
locked in place.
Side Bookbox/
Laptop Holder
Model 17194QS
(For models at least 36" wide)
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne
and Platinum.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
The base's end
caps lock in place
with adjustable
leveling glides.
Model Size Wt.
20" deep Single-Student desk
01360QS 20"d x 27"w x 24-32"h 41 lbs.
01368QS 20"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 50 lbs.
24" deep Single-Student desk
01370QS 24"d x 27"w x 24-32"h 46 lbs.
01371QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 55 lbs.
Hard Plastic Top Student Desk
01362 20"d x 27"w x 24-32"h 41 lbs.
01369 20"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 50 lbs.
Patented backpack peg
keeps student items
organized, can be
positioned inside or
outside of either leg.
Steel Bookbox
Model 17190QS
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne
and Platinum.
Wire Bookbox
Model 17200QS
Black powdercoat finish.
Flex Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Flex Desks.
2" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17552QS set of 4, 2 locking 2 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
129

TWO-STUDENT
FLEX DESK
Two-Student Flex Desk Model 01361
Shown in Blond Echo top with Persian Blue edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Flavors Chairs,
see page 26. Shown with optional EW Totes w/Housing,
Model 30926.
Optional EW Tote Tray
w/Housing
Tote Tray pulls out on rails for easy
access to materials.
Model 30926QS
16 5 /8"d x 18 3 /8"w x 3"h Wt. 5 lbs.
A Stable, Generous Workspace.
Space for two students and great ergonomics
make the Flex Two-Student Desk a great
choice for classrooms. To make it even
greater, the Flex Two-Student Desk offers five
standard combinations of colors and finishes
— and an almost unlimited number
of custom color combinations. You can also
choose from optional casters for added
mobility and steel Bookboxes for storage.
• Patented backpack peg that keeps student items organized, can
be positioned inside or outside of either leg.
• “Y” Leg shape allows easy ingress and egress for students.
• Adjustable desk height, from 24"-32" in 1" increments. Only two
(not four) legs to adjust.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all with a
high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Lockable endcap/glide combination that resists tampering.
130 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Flex Desk
Popular Color Choices
Two-Student Flex Desk Model 01359
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional 4" casters, Model
17554. Shown with optional Intuit Sled Base chair,
see pg. 35. Chairs raised off floor to facilitate cleaning.
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Two-Student Flex Desk Model 01361
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Charcoal edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with two optional Bookboxes,
Model 17190.
Two-Student Flex Desk Model 01380
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and
Navy frame. Shown with optional Brilliant
Adjustable Chair, see page 47.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt. Model Size Wt.
Two-Student Flex Desk
Steel Bookbox — Black powdercoat finish.
01354QS 20"d x 48"w x 24-32"h 61 lbs.
Special order Champagne & Platinum.
01355QS 20"d x 54"w x 24-32"h 65 lbs.
17190QS 15"d x 20"w x 4"h 8 lbs.
01361QS 20"d x 60"w x 24-32"h 73 lbs.
01363QS 20"d x 72"w x 24-32"h 89 lbs.
Wire Bookbox — Black powdercoat finish.
17200QS 15"d x 18"w x 3.5"h 5 lbs.
01382QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-32"h 67 lbs.
01380QS 24"d x 54"w x 24-32"h 72 lbs.
01381QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-32"h 88 lbs.
01359QS 24"d x 72"w x 24-32"h 98 lbs.
2" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17552QS set of 4, 2 locking 2 lbs.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553QS set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
4" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17554QS set of 4, 2 locking 5 lbs.
Flex Desks are protected by patents.
Side Bookbox / Laptop Holder— for models at least 36" wide.
17194QS 12"d x 8"w x 16"h 10 lbs.
Flex Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Flex Desks.
Choice 4-6 are not available on 72"w Flex Desks.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
131

ARC
STUDENT DESK
The base's end caps
lock in place with
adjustable leveling
glides.
Patented backpack
peg keeps student
items organized,
can be positioned
inside or outside of
either leg.
Arc-8 Desk Model 01351V
Shown in Blond Echo top with Apple edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Tote w/Housing,
Model 30926 (see pg. 144 to order) and optional
Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
Model Size Wt.
Arc-8 Desk
01351QS 22"d x 35"w 45 lbs.
The Cooperative Learning Desk.
Everything about the Arc Desk was shaped by
understanding the needs of cooperative learning
environments. It is the first desk to play an active role in
the classroom. Available in three models, the Arc Desk
offers outstanding durability and superior functionality
thanks to features like:
Arc-8LS (Large Surface) Desk
01350QS 27"d x 35"w 50 lbs.
Two-Student Arc Desk
01352QS 24"d x 64"w 96 lbs.
ADA Arc Desk (not shown)
01353QS 30"d x 48"w 75 lbs.
• “Y” Leg shape allows easy ingress and egress for students.
• Desk height adjusts from 24"-32" in 1" increments.
Metal Bookbox - 21"w (front) / 10"w (rear)
Only two legs to adjust.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all
with a high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
Black powdercoat finish. Special order Champagne & Platinum
17016QS 15"d x 3 1 /2"h 6 lbs.
2" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17552QS set of 4, 2 locking 2 lbs.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
Arc Desks and Two-Student Arc Desks are protected by patents pending.
132 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Arc-8 Desk Model 01351
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Bookbox,
Model 17016 and optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 33.
Arc-8 LS Desk Model 01350
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and Navy frame.
Arc Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Two-Student Arc Desk Model 01352
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Brilliant Chair, see pg. 46.
Start the day with Arc
Desks in single-file rows.
One quick turn puts
students face-to-face for
ideal test seating.
Two-Student Arc Desks configured in an eight-student
workstation.
Create semi-circles and connect
notebook computers for team
projects.
Round out the day with
full circles for small group
discussion.
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Maple top, Charcoal edge,
Champagne frame
Grey Nebula top, Navy
edge, Navy frame
A room set-up in semi-circles
allows instructor presentation
and student interaction.
Arc 8
Arc-8 LS Desk (top view) Arc-8 Desk (top view) Two-Student Arc Desk (top view) ADA Arc Desk (top view)
Arc Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Arc Desks.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
133

ARC Desk classroom
by DesignU
Today’s dynamic classroom demands the flexibility of the Arc Desk. It can be arranged for groups up to eight
(as shown), for individual work and lectures, or for any size in between.
The Arc Desk’s pioneering shape allows those large groups to be formed in standard sized classrooms.
By shaving the corners off rectangular desks, space-saving circles can be made.
To explore alternate floor plans using this furniture, visit DesignU at SmithSystem.com
BRILLIANT CHAIR
Durable, ergonomic, lightweight:
an ideal chair for
active classrooms.
UXL ADJUSTABLE
CHAIR
Mobile, comfortable.
PLANNER TRAPEZOID
ACTIVITY TABLE
Space-efficient shape enables
individual or group work.
134
ARC-8 DESK
Create groups up to eight in a
small space.
THREE FLAT-SHELF TRUCK
Ideal for large items or for
bins containing small items.
48"h SINGLE-FACE SHELVING
60"h DOUBLE-FACE SHELVING
Flexible, efficient classroom
storage.

ARC CLASSROOM itemized
model quantity description
11870 24 Brilliant Stack Chair (Navy)
XL035FIPILR 1 UXL Adjustable Chair (Navy) w/left/right arms and casters
25600 3 Trapezoid Planner Activity Table (Wild Cherry/Black/Black)
01351 24 Arc-8 Student Desk (Wild Cherry/Navy/Navy)
21096 3 Three Sloping Shelf Truck - one sided (Navy)
22631 1 48"h Single-Face Shelving (Charcoal) shelves: 1 flat base, 2 adj. periodical
23622 2 48"h Single Face End Panels (Wild Cherry)
23413 1 Single Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
22158 1 60"h Double-Face Shelving (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat base, 6 adj. flat
23537 2 60"h Double-Face End Panels (Wild Cherry)
23403 1 Single Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
135

FLEX
STATION
Flex Station Model 01378
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and
Champagne frame. Optional Intuit Sled Base Chair,
see pg. 34. Optional Flat-Panel Monitor Mount,
Model 17350 (see pg. 145).
Add mobility when needed with 3" or 4" casters:
choose two casters (moves like a wheelbarrow)
or four. Order casters separately, see pg. 144.
Solutions for Laptop Learning.
The Flex Station is truly flexible, with an oversize top that’s perfect
for today’s project learning environments. Choose from Single-
Student or Two-Student stations available in ten sizes.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all
with a high-pressure laminate surface.
• Edge moldings resist wear, choices available (see chart).
• For maximum stability, a 14-gauge steel mounting plate
is welded to a Y-Leg made of 16-gauge steel tubing.
• Our patented backpack peg is on both the right and
left leg, allowing backpacks to be hung under or
outside the desk.
• Legs adjust from 24" to 32" high in 1" increments.
All Flex Stations come
standard with modesty
panel and wireway
management.
Lockable
end-cap/glide
combination resists
tampering.
Flex Stations Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Flex Desks.
Choice 4-6 are not available on 72"w Flex Desks.
136 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Flex Station Model 01383
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Purple edge and
Platinum frame.
Flex Station Model 01386
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and Navy
frame. Shown with optional Drawer Pedestal, Model 19173
and optional 3" dual wheel casters, Model 17553. Optional
Brilliant Chair, see pg. 47.
Flex Station
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Flex Station Model 01386
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Charcoal edge and
Black frame. Optional Brilliant Chair, see pg. 47.
Flex Station Model 01383
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional CPU Holder, see pg. 144.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt. Model Size Wt.
24" deep Flex Station
Mobile Drawer Pedestal — box/box/file
01373QS 24"d x 30"w x 24-32"h 60 lbs.
19173QS 15 1 /2"d x 22"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
01374QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 68 lbs.
01376QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-32"h 88 lbs.
Surge-Protected Power Strip
01377QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-32"h 96 lbs.
17081QS 6-outlet 4 lbs.
01378QS 24"d x 72"w x 24-32"h 106 lbs.
17084QS 10-outlet 4 lbs.
30" deep Flex Station
01383QS 30"d x 36"w x 24-32"h 76 lbs.
01384QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-32"h 98 lbs.
01385QS 30"d x 30"w x 24-32"h 74 lbs.
01386QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-32"h 106 lbs.
01387QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-32"h 120 lbs.
Flex Desks are protected by patents.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553QS set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
4" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17554QS set of 4, 2 locking 5 lbs.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
137

LEONARDO!
DESK
Leonardo! Left Hand Workstation Model 01560
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Forest Green edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Brilliant Adjustable
Chair, see pg. 47.
Designed for Computer Labs.
Flexline Leonardo!’s angled top in left and right hand models allows
great classroom layouts with good sightlines. Use Leonardo! to form
rows or back-to-back layouts: the unique top shape allows students to
focus on both the computer and the instructor.
Patented backpack peg
keeps student items
organized, can be
positioned inside or
outside of either leg.
• Angled top area is 30" deep and 24" wide with a work
area of 24" x 24".
• Cord cutout at rear of work surface.
• Leonardo! legs adjust from 24" to 32" high in 1"
increments to accommodate all ages of students.
• Color-matched combination end cap/glide locks in
place to resist tampering.
• 16-gauge steel modesty panel with tilt down wireway.
Leonardo! Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Leonardo! Desks.
138 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Model 01560 (left hand) &
Model 01565 (right hand)
shown side-by-side.
Leonardo! Two-Student Workstation Model 01570
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and Navy frame.
Shown with optional Brilliant Chair, see pg. 47.
Leonardo! Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Wave Top Flex Station Model 01550
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Forest
Green edge and Platinum frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Flexline Corner Workstation Model 01379
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Champagne edge
and Champagne frame. Shown with optional Intuit
Adjustable Chair, see pg. 35.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Wire cutouts and tilt down
wireway keep cables
orderly for tidier desk tops.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt. Model Size Wt.
Wave Top Flex Station
Mobile Drawer Pedestal — box/box/file
01550QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-32"h 100 lbs.
19173QS 15 1 /2"d x 22"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
Leonardo! Left Hand Workstation
01560QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-32"h 93 lbs.
Leonardo! Right Hand Workstation
01565QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-32"h 93 lbs.
Leonardo! Two-Student Workstation
01570QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-32"h 120 lbs.
Surge-Protected Power Strip
17081QS 6-outlet 4 lbs.
17084QS 10-outlet 4 lbs.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553QS set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
4" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17554QS set of 4, 2 locking 5 lbs.
Flexline Corner Workstation (six 24" sides)
01379QS 34"d x 59"w x 24-32"h 85 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
139

WORK CENTER
TABLE
Flexline Circle Center, Three-Student Half Circle
Model 01590
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Black edge and
Black frame.
Cost-Efficient Learning Clusters.
Flexline Circle Centers fit neatly against walls or pair up to
create full-circle work stations. A center cutout allows for neat
wire management and keeps cords out of the way. Optional
riser shelves increase the workspace area by making room for
computer peripherals and student materials
• Patented backpack peg, that keeps student items
organized, can be positioned inside or outside of either leg.
• “Y” Leg shape allows easy ingress and egress for students.
• Adjustable desk height from 24"-32" in 1" increments.
• Choose from several options of tops and edges.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• Lockable endcap/glide combination that resists tampering.
Model Size Wt.
Flexline Two-Student Half Circle
01580QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-32"h 115 lbs.
Two-Student Half Circle Riser Shelf — 24" radius
11500QS 24"d x 48"w x 12-22"h 64 lbs.
Flexline Three-Student Half Circle
01590QS 42"d x 84"w x 24-32"h 136 lbs.
Three-Student Half Circle Riser Shelf — 30" radius
11501QS 30"d x 60"w x 12-22"h 80 lbs.
Flex Desks are protected by patents.
140 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Our patented backpack
peg is on both the right
and left leg, allowing
backpacks to be hung
under or outside the desk.
Three-Student Flexline Trapezoid Work Center Model 01340
Shown in Golden Oak top with Black edge and Black frame.
Flexline Work Center
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Two-Student Riser Shelf
Model 11500 (back-to-back).
Work Center Accessories
Surge-Protected Power Strip
17081QS 6-outlet
17084QS 10-outlet
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
set of 4, 2 locking
17553QS Wt. 3 lbs.
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Three-Student Flexline Trapezoid Work Center Model 01340
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and Navy frame. Shown with
optional Brilliant Adjustable Chairs, see pg. 47.
Clusters for Computer Learning.
If laptop computers have made their way into your
classroom, the Flex Station helps you create an
optimal learning environment. Trapezoid Flex Tables
permit unique classroom configurations for group
learning. Use them separately to accommodate three
students or place two together to create a hexagon
work area. Two sizes are available.
Flexline Circle Centers Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Flexline Circle Centers.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Model Size Wt.
Flexline Trapezoid Work Centers
01340QS 35"d x 80"w x 24-32"h 153 lbs.
01345QS 44"d x 96"w x 24-32"h 208 lbs.
Riser Shelf for Trapezoid Work Centers
01792QS 21"d x 45"w x 16-20"h 48 lbs.
01790QS 26"d x 57"w x 16-20"h 63 lbs.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
141

ADA
COMPUTER DESK
ADA Computer Desk Model 26597
Shown in Golden Oak top with Forest Green edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional casters. Order
separately. Shown with optional Library Adjustable Chair, see
pg. 237 and optional Mobile Drawer Pedestal, see pg. 144.
Access to E-Learning for Students with Disabilities.
Our ADA Computer Desk is designed to enable students with
disabilities to take part in computer learning. To help meet special
height requirements, a hand crank on the underside of the work
surface allows easy adjustment, so the desk can be fitted to the
individual student.
• Durable desktop available in 1 1 /4" or 3 /4" thickness, all with a
high-pressure laminate surface.
• Cable tray and port holes in the modesty panel keep wires
neatly organized.
• Desktop can be raised up to 32", providing up to 30 3 /4" of
clearance below.
Hand crank is hidden
under desktop.
Work surface adjusts
23"-32" high.
Note: Crank is toward
modesty panel. Some
handicapped students
may need assistance.
142 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

ADA Computer Desk Model 26576
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional casters. Order
separately. Shown with optional Adjustable Library Chair,
see pg. 237.
ADA Computer Desk Model 26556
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Clementine edge and
Champagne frame.
ADA Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
Pull-Out Keyboard Model 17620
Features 6" height adjustment with 10° tilt and
180° swivel with easy single control. For 30"
deep desks.
Tower CPU Holder Model 17213
Heavy steel plate mounts under work surface.
Adjusts 7"-10"w and 17"-21"h. Black steel tube
frame with locks to hold tower in place.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt.
ADA Computer Desk
26556QS 24"d x 36"w x 23-32"h 89 lbs.
26576QS 30"d x 36"w x 23-32"h 97 lbs.
26596QS 24"d x 60"w x 23-32"h 134 lbs.
26597QS 30"d x 60"w x 23-32"h 144 lbs.
For ADA compliance use 30" deep work stations with minimum 36" width.
ADA Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge E to follow Model No.
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold G to follow Model No.
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold V to follow Model No.
See pages 144 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on ADA Desks.
3/4" thick tops not available on Model 28576 or Model 26597
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Model Size Wt.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553QS set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
4" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17554QS set of 4, 2 locking 5 lbs.
Pull-Out Keyboard — For 30" ADA desks only
17620QS 17"d x 22"w x 6"h 20 lbs.
Tower CPU Holder — For 30" ADA desks only
17213QS 13"d x 7"w x 16"h 12 lbs.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
143

FLEXLINE
ACCESSORIES
WHAT’S YOUR PROFILE?
Now available in 3 /4" and 1 1 /4" thicknesses, Smith
System tables and desktops give you the option
of lending the room a light or substantial feel.
Similarly, our edge band treatments give the
choice of crisp, clean 90-degree angles, or the
curved, gentle profile of bullet or bumper edges.
F
H
CHOICE 1
CHOICE 2
Bumper
T-Mold
3mm Edge
3mm T-Mold
E
G
V
CHOICE 4
CHOICE 5
CHOICE 6
3mm Edge
3mm T-Mold
Bullet T-Mold
CHOICE 3
EW TOTE TRAY WITH HOUSING
Tote Tray pulls out on rails for easy
access to materials.
16 5 /8"d x 18 3 /8"w x 3"h Wt. 5 lbs.
Model 30926QS
File/File
Model 19172QS
Box/Box/File
Model 19173QS
MOBILE DRAWER
PEDESTAL
Cabinets have steel welded
construction with rounded
corners and gang lock.
Drawers have flush pulls
and ball bearing race
slides. All mobile units
have 2" dual wheel casters.
Colors: Champagne,
Platinum, Black or Navy.
22"d x 15 1 /2"w x 24 1 /2"h,
Wt. 50 lbs.
PULL-OUT KNEE DRAWER
Black molded drawer mounts
under work surface. Molded
pencil area 19"d.
16"d x 23"w x 2"h
Model 17342QS
144
CASTERS
Casters have 3 /16” x
18 threaded stem.
4 pack of 3" dual wheel
casters, Wt. 3 lbs.
Model 17553QS
4 pack of 4" dual wheel
casters, Wt. 5 lbs.
Model 17554QS
Wheelbarrow Mobility
2 pack of 2" dual wheel
casters, Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 17549QS
POLE LEG RISER SHELF - Clamp-on Pole (Platinum only)
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17665QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 26 lbs.
17666QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 29 lbs.
17667QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17668QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 45 lbs.
17669QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 51 lbs.
17677QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 73 lbs.
17679QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 94 lbs.
17680QS 12"d x 90"w x 12"h 106 lbs.
Add a ‘V’ following Model No. to order a 3 /4" thick top
ACROBAT LEG RISER SHELF
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17645QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 31 lbs.
17646QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17647QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 39 lbs.
17648QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 50 lbs.
17649QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 56 lbs.
17657QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 78 lbs.
17659QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 99 lbs.
Add a ‘V’ following Model No. to order a 3 /4" thick top

FLAT-PANEL MONITOR MOUNTS FOR DESKS AND TABLES
TILT MOUNT
Wt. 6 lbs.
Model 17350 QS
TILT & SWIVEL
MOUNT
Wt. 7 lbs.
Model 17351QS
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 8 lbs.
Model 17352QS
CLAMP STYLE
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17353QS
SPRING LOADED
MOUNT
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17655 PLT QS
CPU HOLDERS
Heavy steel plate mounts under work surface.
Adjusts 7-10”w and 17-21” high. Black steel tube
frame with locks to hold tower in place.
13"d x 7"w x 16"h Wt. 12 lbs.
Model 17213QS
Note: 3-student stations will not accommodate three
CPU tower holders.
10 OUTLET SURGE PROTECTOR
15 ft. heavy duty cord Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 17084QS
6 OUTLET SURGE PROTECTOR
4 ft. heavy duty cord Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 17081QS
(Has surge protection and noise filter.)
145

High-functionality furniture for secondary and
post-secondary education.
UXL Furniture is customizable – literally – from
the floor up. This gives UXL furniture unbeatable
functionality; it is customizable to fit almost every
situation in an educational environment.
Just as important, UXL is a comprehensive line
of seating, tables and desking which allows the
designer or facilities planner to maintain a
consistent color and design scheme throughout
an entire building, from common areas to
classrooms, from offices to labs.
The UXL line is about more choices. Of colors,
accessories, fabrics, finishes and functions. It’s a
turnkey solution that requires no compromises
between design consistency and functionality.
146

147

UXL
OPEN FRONT DESK
Single-Student UXL Open Front Desk
Model OF2027BECJPLTAL
Shown in a Blond Echo top/Persian Blue edge.
Push-button adjustable legs with casters.
Shown with optional Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
THE OPEN FRONT DESK WITH MORE OPTIONS.
The new UXL Open Front Desk features a work surface
large enough to simultaneously accommodate a laptop,
textbook and notebook, and an integrated Bookbox big
enough to hold all that and more. It also presents the
designer with a wide array of options. Three different
styles of legs, laminate finishes and edge molding colors
can all be selected. These options allow UXL Open Front
Desks to complement the entire line of UXL furnishings,
including tables and seating. This allows you to create a
unified design scheme throughout the facility.
• UXL Desks are standard with 3 /4" top with T-Mold.
148 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Single-Student UXL Open Front Desk
Model OF2027PMEAPLTAL
Shown in a Pewter Mesh top/Apple edge. Push-button
adjustable legs with glides. Shown with optional Flavors Chair,
see pg. 26.

Single-Student UXL Open Front Desk
Model OF2027TECGPLTFL
Shown in a Tan Echo top/Fuchsia edge.
Fixed-height legs with glides.
Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 32.
UXL Open Front Student Desk Choices
1
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
2
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M), Yellow (N), Champagne (O),
Platinum (P), Chocolate (Q).
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
3 CHOOSE LEG TYPE:
Two-Student UXL Open Front Desk
Model OF2448BECAPLTFL
Shown in a Blond Echo top/Apple edge. Fixed-height legs
with glides. Shown with Flavors Chair, see pg. 26.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Open Front Student Desk - Fixed-height Leg
OF2027_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 27"w x 29 1 /2"h 56 lbs.
UXL Open Front Student Desk - Push-button Adjustable-height Leg
OF2448_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 60 lbs.
(FL) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(standard leg, no upcharge)
(FC) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
(AL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 27"-33"h
(AC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 27"-33"h
(SL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 24"-29"h
(SC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 24"-29"h
(TG) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(TL) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
See pages 164-165 for detailed description and upcharge
for optional leg sets
1
OF _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ PLT _ _
2
OF Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
choose leg type
3
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
149

UXL
STUDENT DESK
Single-Student UXL Student Desk
Model XL2436PMEJPLTTL
Offers a large stable workspace for one adult or young
adult. Shown in a Pewter Mesh top/Persian Blue edge.
Tapered Platinum legs with casters. Shown with UXL
Stacking Chair in Persian Blue, see pg. 36.
Desking for Secondary and Post-Secondary Classrooms.
The new UXL Student Desk offers working space large enough to
simultaneously accommodate a laptop, textbook and notebook. Its
graceful, contemporary appearance belies its sturdy construction,
including 16-gauge steel legs and a desktop that measures 3 /4" thick
with a high-pressure laminate surface.
The UXL Student Desk offers so many choices when it comes to work
surface and edge molding colors, leg styles and accessories, it’s
almost like getting a custom desk. UXL Student Desks complement
the entire line of UXL furnishings, including tables and seating. This
allows you to create a unified design scheme throughout the facility.
1
XL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ PLT _ _
2
3
UXL Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
choose leg type
150 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Two-Student UXL Student Desk
Model XL2460BECPPLTFC
Offers ample workspace for two adults or young adults. Shown in a
Blond Echo top/Platinum edge. Fixed-height Platinum legs with
casters. Optional Mobile UXL Stacking Chairs, see pg. 38.
Three-Student UXL Student Desk Model XL3090GMEMPLTTL
Offers a large stable workspace for three adults or young adults. Shown
in a Grey Mesh top/White edge. Fixed-height Tapered Platinum legs
with casters. Optional UXL Stacking Chairs, see pg. 36.
1
UXL Student Desk Choices
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
2
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M), Yellow (N), Champagne (O),
Platinum (P), Chocolate (Q).
Four-Student UXL Student Desk Model XL2490AMCQPLTAC
Offers a large stable workspace for four adults or young adults. Shown in an
Amber Cherry top/Chocolate edge. Push-button Adjustable-height Platinum legs
with casters. Optional Intuit ‘B’ shell Chairs shown, in Persian Blue, see pg. 33.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Student Desk - Fixed-height Leg
XL2030_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 56 lbs.
XL2036_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 61 lbs.
XL2048_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 70 lbs.
XL2060_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 75 lbs.
XL2072_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL2090_ _ _ _ PLT FL 20"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 100 lbs.
XL2430_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 60 lbs.
XL2436_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 75 lbs.
XL2448_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 80 lbs.
XL2460_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL2472_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 105 lbs.
XL2490_ _ _ _ PLT FL 24"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 122 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
3 CHOOSE LEG TYPE:
(FL) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(standard leg, no upcharge)
(FC) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
(AL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 27"-33"h
(AC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 27"-33"h
(SL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 24"-29"h
(SC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 24"-29"h
(TG) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(TL) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
See pages 164-165 for detailed description and upcharge
for optional leg sets
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
151

UXL
DIAMOND DESK
Single-Student Diamond Desk
Seats 6
Two-Student Diamond Desk
Single-Student UXL Diamond Desks
Model XLSSDMGMEAPLTFC
Can be separated for individual work, testing and lectures.
Shown in a Grey Mesh top/Apple edge. Fixed-height
Platinum legs with casters. Shown with optional UXL
Stacking Chair in Apple, see pg. 37.
Seats 6
Innovative Desking for Adults and Young Adults
Designed to facilitate both individual and group work for
secondary and post-secondary students, the new UXL
Diamond Desk offers a stable, spacious work surface and
contemporary appearance. The distinctive shape of the
UXL Diamond Desk allows groups of up to six to be
created in a surprisingly small space.
• 3 /4" thick high-pressure laminate top.
• Bullet-shaped edge molding contributes to a lighter
profile.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Diamond Desk
XLSSDM_ _ _ _PLTFL Single-Student 40 lbs.
XLTSDM_ _ _ _PLTFL Two-Student 70 lbs.
XL _ _ _ _
1 2
3
_ _ _
_
PLT _ _
UXL Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
choose leg type
152 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Single-Student UXL Diamond Desk
Model XLSSDMGMEAPLTFC
Offers a large stable workspace for one adult or young adult. Combine six
Single-Student UXL Diamond Desks to make a compact six-student work
group. Shown in a Pewter Mesh top/Apple edge. Fixed-height Platinum legs
with casters. Shown with optional UXL Stacking Chairs, see pg. 37.
Single-Student UXL Diamond Desks
can be paired for small group work.
1
UXL Diamond Desk Choices
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
2
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M), Yellow (N), Champagne (O),
Platinum (P), Chocolate (Q).
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
Two-Student Diamond Desk
Model XLTSDMGMEJPLTFC (front desk)
Two-Student and Single-Student UXL Diamond Desks can be oriented to facilitate
lectures. Two-Student shown in Grey Mesh top/Persian Blue edge (front desk)
and Grey Mesh top/Fuchsia edge (back desk). Fixed-height Platinum legs with
casters. Shown with optional UXL Stacking Chairs, see pg. 37. Shown grouped
with (2) Single-Student UXL Diamond Desks. See models listed below.
3 CHOOSE LEG TYPE:
(FL) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(standard leg, no upcharge)
(FC) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5”h
(AL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 27"-33"h
(AC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 27"-33"h
(SL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 24"-29"h
(SC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 24"-29"h
(TG) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(TL) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
See pages 164-165 for detailed description and upcharge
for optional leg sets
Group Two-Student UXL Diamond Desks to
accommodate group work for up to four students.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
153

UXL
TABLES
UXL 60" Half Round Table
Model XL60HRTECAPLTAL (x2)
Optional Table
Ganging Device
Model 67628 PLT
Shown in Platinum
UXL 30" x 60" Table
Model XL3060TECAPLTFL (x2)
Tables shown in Tan Echo top/Apple edge. Platinum
Push-button Adjustable-height legs with glides. Shown
with optional UXL Stacking Chairs, see pg. 37.
Designed for secondary and post-secondary learning.
Part of a fully integrated line of seating, desking and accessories
that allow design continuity throughout the facility - from
classrooms to common areas, the UXL Table provides a spacious
work surface and contemporary appearance.
The UXL Table offers a wealth of choices in work surface and edge
molding colors, leg styles and accessories like a Wireway, Modesty
Panel, Monitor Mount, Screen and Hanging Accessories – so many
choices, it’s like a custom desk.
Desktop measures 3 /4" thick with high-pressure laminate work
surface and features a bullet edge molding that contributes to
a lighter profile.
UXL 42" x 60" Table Model XL4260BECHPLTFL
Shown in Blond Echo top/Mint edge. Platinum Fixed-height
legs with glides. Shown with optional UXL Mobile Chairs,
see pg. 39.
154 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL 48" Round Table
Model XL48RDAMCQPLTTL
Shown in Amber Cherry top/Chocolate
edge. Platinum Tapered Fixed-height legs
with casters.
UXL 60" Half Round Table
Model XL60HRTECAPLTAL
Shown in Tan Echo top/Apple edge.
Platinum Push-button Adjustable-height
legs with glides.
UXL 72" Trapezoid Table
Model XL72TRPMELPLTAC
Shown in Pewter Mesh top/Red edge. Platinum
Push-button Adjustable-height legs with casters.
Shown with optional Intuit Stacking Chairs, see pg. 33.
UXL Table Choices
Model Description Wt.
UXL Rectangle Top Table Fixed-height Leg
XL2430_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 60 lbs.
XL2436_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 75 lbs.
XL2448_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 80 lbs.
XL2460_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL2472_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 105 lbs.
XL2490_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 122 lbs.
XL3030_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 65 lbs.
XL3036_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 78 lbs.
XL3048_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL3060_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 104 lbs.
XL3072_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 126 lbs.
XL3090_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 137 lbs.
XL3636_ _ _ _PLTFL 36"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 81 lbs.
XL3648_ _ _ _PLTFL 36"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 100 lbs.
XL3660_ _ _ _PLTFL 36"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 118 lbs.
XL3672_ _ _ _PLTFL 36"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 137 lbs.
XL3690_ _ _ _PLTFL 36"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 152 lbs.
XL4242_ _ _ _PLTFL 42"d x 42"w x 29 1 /2"h 100 lbs.
XL4248_ _ _ _PLTFL 42"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 110 lbs.
XL4260_ _ _ _PLTFL 42"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 132 lbs.
XL4272_ _ _ _PLTFL 42"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 148 lbs.
XL4290_ _ _ _PLTFL 42"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 167 lbs.
UXL Round Top Table Fixed-height Leg
XL42RD_ _ _ _PLT FL 42" dia. x 29 1 /2"h 86 lbs.
XL48RD_ _ _ _PLT FL 48" dia. x 29 1 /2"h 98 lbs.
XL60RD_ _ _ _PLT FL 60" dia. x 29 1 /2"h 136 lbs.
UXL Half Round Top Table Fixed-height Leg
XL60HR_ _ _ _PLT FL Half of 60" Round 65 lbs.
UXL Trap Top Table Fixed-height Leg
XL60TR_ _ _ _PLT FL 30"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL72TR_ _ _ _PLT FL 30"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 106 lbs.
Table Ganging Device
67628PLT
1 lbs.
1
2
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M), Yellow (N), Champagne (O),
Platinum (P), Chocolate (Q).
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
3 CHOOSE LEG TYPE:
(FL) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(standard leg, no upcharge)
(FC) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
(AL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 27"-33"h
(AC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 27"-33"h
(SL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 24"-29"h
(SC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 24"-29"h
(TG) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(TL) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
See pages 164-165 for detailed description and upcharge
for optional leg sets
XL _ _ _ _
1 2
3
_ _ _
_
PLT _ _
UXL Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
choose leg type
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
155

UXL
COMPUTER STATION
UXL 30" x 90" Table Model XL3090GMEMPLTFL
Shown in Grey Mesh top/White edge/Platinum Fixedheight
legs with glides. Shown with optional Wire Manager,
Model 17045. Shown with optional UXL Stacking Chairs,
see pg. 37.
Optimizing the Post-Secondary Computer Lab Environment.
Computer labs have come a long way from the repurposed spaces
they originally occupied. When purpose designed, computer labs are
fully functioning learning environments.
With UXL Computer Stations, the designer can create the desired lab
environment while keeping a look consistent with the furniture in the
rest of the building: Work surface and edge molding colors, leg styles
and accessories can match colors throughout the school. Accessories
like a Wire Manager, Modesty Panel, Monitor Mount, Screen and
Hanging Accessories increase functionality.
UXL Power Socket Model
17083 is durable and
attaches securely to the
work surface. 10' long cord.
UXL Power Socket and
UXL Wireway, shown in
open position.
The UXL Computer Station's desktop measures 3 /4" thick with
high-pressure laminate work surface and offers a bullet-shaped
edge molding that contributes to a lighter profile.
156 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL Science Table
24" x 60" Table Model XT2460GRYPLTFL
Shown in Grey Trespa TopLab Plus/Platinum
Fixed-height legs with glides.
Model Size Wt.
UXL Science Table Fixed-height Leg
XT2448_ _ _ PLTFL 24"d x 48"w x 29.5"h 81 lbs.
XT2454_ _ _ PLTFL 24"d x 54"w x 29.5"h 87 lbs.
XT2460_ _ _ PLTFL 24"d x 60"w x 29.5"h 91 lbs.
XT2472_ _ _ PLTFL 24"d x 72"w x 29.5"h 106 lbs.
SCIENCE TOP COLOR CHOICE: Grey Trespa TopLab Plus (GRY) or
Black Trespa TopLab Plus (BLA)
UXL 30" x 60" Table Model XL3060TECAPLTAL
Shown in Tan Echo top/Apple edge/Platinum Push-button Adjustable-height
legs with glides. Accessorized with two optional Screens, see pg. 161 to
order. Shown with optional UXL Stacking Chairs in Apple, see pg. 37.
Model Size Wt.
UXL Rectangle Top Table Fixed-height Leg
XL2430_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 60 lbs.
XL2436_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 75 lbs.
XL2448_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 80 lbs.
XL2460_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL2472_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 105 lbs.
XL2490_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 122 lbs.
XL3030_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 65 lbs.
XL3036_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 78 lbs.
XL3048_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL3060_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 104 lbs.
XL3072_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 126 lbs.
XL3090_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 137 lbs.
UXL Corner Table Fixed-height Leg
XL5STR_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
Wire Management & Accessories
17040 Wire Manager for 30" Wide Table
17041 Wire Manager for 36" Wide Table
17042 Wire Manager for 48" Wide Table
17043 Wire Manager for 60" Wide Table
17044 Wire Manager for 72" Wide Table
17045 Wire Manager for 90" Wide Table
17083 Power Socket (4 power plugs, 2 data plugs)
1 2 3
XL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ PLT _ _
UXL Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
choose leg
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
1
2
UXL Table Choices
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M), Yellow (N), Champagne (O),
Platinum (P), Chocolate (Q).
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
3 CHOOSE LEG TYPE:
(FL) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(standard leg, no upcharge)
(FC) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
(AL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 27"-33"h
(AC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 27"-33"h
(SL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 24"-29"h
(SC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 24"-29"h
(TG) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(TL) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
See pages 164-165 for detailed description and upcharge
for optional leg sets
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
157

UXL
ENSEMBLES
UXL 30" x 72" Table Model XL3072TECAPLTAL
UXL 30" x 60" Table Model XL3060TECAPLTFL
UXL Corner Table Model XL5STRTECAPLTAL
ADAPTABLE TO ENVIRONMENTS OF ALL KINDS.
The crowning feature of the UXL line of furniture is its
almost infinite capacity for customization. UXL Tables
can create workstations for classroom, lab and office with
the addition of UXL Accessories. The result is customized
functionality to fit the need. At the same time, the furniture
will exactly match the look of the other UXL furniture being
used elsewhere in the building.
UXL 30" x 60" Table Model XL3060TECAPLTFL
UXL Corner Table Model XL5STRTECAPLTAL
Shown in Tan Echo top/Apple edge. Platinum Fixed-height
legs with glides. Accessorized with Modesty Panel, Wire
Manager, two Screens, Universal Rail and Document Trays.
158 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Gang tables together with this
optional accessory.
UXL 30" x 60" Table
Model XL3060TECAPLT_ _ (x2)
Accessorized with Modesty Panel,
Wire Manager, four Screens, Universal
Rail and Document Trays. See page 161
to order. Shown with UXL Nest & Fold
Chair, see pg. 45.
1
UXL Table Choices
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE), Grey Mesh (GME),
Grey Nebula (GNB), Golden Oak (GOK),
Maple (MAP), New Age Oak (NAO),
Pewter Mesh (PME), Tan Echo (TEC).
UXL 30" x 60" Table
Model XL3060TECAPLTFL
Shown in Tan Echo top/Apple edge.
Platinum Fixed-height legs with
glides. Accessorized with Modesty
Panel, Wire Manager, two Screens,
Universal Rail and Document Trays.
See page 161 to order.
2
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR:
Apple (A), Black (B), Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D),
Clementine (E), Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G),
Mint (H), Navy (I), Persian Blue (J), Purple (K),
Red (L), White (M), Yellow (N), Champagne (O),
Platinum (P), Chocolate (Q).
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
3 CHOOSE LEG TYPE:
Model Size Wt.
UXL Rectangle Top Table Fixed-height Leg
XL2430_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 60 lbs.
XL2436_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 75 lbs.
XL2448_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 80 lbs.
XL2460_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL2472_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 105 lbs.
XL2490_ _ _ _PLTFL 24"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 122 lbs.
XL3030_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 30"w x 29 1 /2"h 65 lbs.
XL3036_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 36"w x 29 1 /2"h 78 lbs.
XL3048_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
XL3060_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 60"w x 29 1 /2"h 104 lbs.
XL3072_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 72"w x 29 1 /2"h 120 lbs.
XL3090_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 90"w x 29 1 /2"h 137 lbs.
UXL Corner Table Fixed-height Leg
XL5STR_ _ _ _PLTFL 30"d x 48"w x 29 1 /2"h 90 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
(FL) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(standard leg, no upcharge)
(FC) Straight Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
(AL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 27"-33"h
(AC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 27"-33"h
(SL) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/glide, 24"-29"h
(SC) Push-button Adjustable-height leg
w/caster, 24"-29"h
(TG) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/glide, 29.5"h
(TL) Tapered Fixed-height leg
w/caster, 29.5"h
See pages 164-165 for detailed description and upcharge
for optional leg sets
1 2 3
XL _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ PLT _ _
UXL Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
choose leg
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
159

UXL
TABLE ACCESSORIES
UXL Accessories let you turn a UXL Desk into a
customized workspace adding as much functionality
as the users’ tasks require and as much privacy as the
environment requires.
Document Tray Portrait
(Model 38545 PLT)
UXL 30" x 60" Table
(Model XL3060TECPLTFL)
From the Translucent Screens to the Flat-Panel Monitor
Mounts to the Universal Rails and Upright poles, UXL
Accessories have a feeling of substance and
permanence. Yet they can be easily interchanged as
the users’ needs change.
Plastic Stationery Holder
(Model 38548 PLT)
Monitor Mount w/ arm
(Models 17653 & 17654)
Plastic Stationery Tray
(Model 38547 PLT)
Wire Manager
(Model 17043)
160 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

POLE LEG RISER SHELF - Clamp-On Pole (Platinum only)
1 1 /4" thick top* with Bumper T-Mold is standard.
Model Description Wt.
17665QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 26 lbs.
17666QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 29 lbs.
17667QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17668QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 45 lbs.
17669QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 51 lbs.
17677QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 73 lbs.
17679QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 94 lbs.
17680QS 12"d x 90"w x 12"h 106 lbs.
*To match the 3 /4" thick top of a UXL Desk, please
order with a ‘V’ following Model No.
UXL Table with Fixed-height legs with glides. Accessorized
with a Wire Manager, two Screens and Hanging Accessories.
UXL Table shown in Tan Echo top/Apple edge. Platinum
Fixed-height leg with glides. Shown with optional UXL Nest
& Fold Chair, see pg. 45.
UXL Spring-Loaded Table-Mounted
Flat-Panel Monitor Mount
(Model 17655 PLT).
Attaches securely to the table, height,
distance and angle adjust to allow
optimal ergonomics for the user.
UXL Table
accessorized with a
Wire Manager, Modesty
Panel, two Screens,
Document Trays and
Flat-Panel Monitor
Mount.
Model
Description
Accessories
17040 Wire Manager for 30" Wide Table
17041 Wire Manager for 36" Wide Table
17042 Wire Manager for 48" Wide Table
17043 Wire Manager for 60" Wide Table
17044 Wire Manager for 72" Wide Table
17045 Wire Manager for 90" Wide Table
17083 Power Socket (4 Power Plugs, 2 Data Plugs)
17100 30"w Desk Modesty Panel (22" x 13.5" x 0.75")
17101 36"w Desk Modesty Panel (28" x 13.5" x 0.75")
17102 48"w Desk Modesty Panel (40" x 13.5" x 0.75")
17103 60"w Desk Modesty Panel (52" x 13.5" x 0.75")
17104 72"w Desk Modesty Panel (64" x 13.5" x 0.75")
17105 90"w Desk Modesty Panel (82" x 13.5" x 0.75")
Partition Walls Description
No screen
17300 35" wide wall (18" tall)
17301 43" wide wall (18" tall)
17302 54.75" wide wall (18" tall)
17303 66.5" wide wall (18" tall)
One screen
17310 35" wide wall (18" tall)
17311 43" wide wall (18" tall)
17312 54.75" wide wall (18" tall)
17314 66.5" wide wall (18" tall)
Two screens
17320 35" wide wall (18" tall)
17321 43" wide wall (18" tall)
17322 54.75" wide wall (18" tall)
17323 66.5" wide wall (18" tall)
Partition Wall Accessories
38545 PLT Document Tray (Portrait)
38546 PLT Document Tray (Landscape)
38547 PLT Plastic Stationery Tray
38548 PLT Plastic Stationery Holder
17653 PLT Monitor Mount for Universal Rail
17654 PLT Monitor Mount Arm
17655 PLT Spring Loaded Monitor Mount
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
161

UXL
NEST & FOLD TABLES
UXL Nest & Fold 30" x 60" Rectangle Table
Model NF3060AMCQPLT (x2)
Shown in Amber Cherry top/Chocolate edge.
Platinum frame with casters.
UXL Nest & Fold 60" Half Round Table
Model NF60HRAMCQPLT (x2)
Shown in Amber Cherry top/Chocolate edge. Platinum
frame with casters. Shown with optional UXL Nest &
Fold Chairs, see pg. 45.
Designed for Added Utility.
Created for secondary and post-secondary learning, the UXL Nest
& Fold Table offers a stable, spacious surface and contemporary
appearance when in use. Its added utility is found in how it performs
when not in use: Its tabletop folds, and the legs nest to make it more
compact during storage. Casters are standard.
Additionally, the UXL Nest & Fold Table is a part of a fully integrated
line of seating, desking and accessories that allows design continuity
throughout the facility - from classrooms to common areas.
The table is 30" high including a 3 /4" thick top with a high-pressure
laminate work surface. The table offers a bullet-shaped edge molding
that contributes to a lighter profile.
UXL Nest & Fold Rectangle and Half Round
Tables shown nested for easy storage.
162 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

UXL Nest & Fold 30" x 60" Rectangle Table
Model NF3060AMCQPLT
Shown in Amber Cherry top/Chocolate edge/Platinum
frame with casters. Also shown with optional UXL Nest
& Fold Chairs in Blueberry, see pg. 45.
UXL Nest & Fold 30" x 60" Table
Model NF3060AMCQPLT
Shown in Amber Cherry top/Chocolate edge/Platinum
frame with casters.
UXL Nest & Fold 48" Round Table
Model NF48RDGMEBPLT
Shown in Grey Mesh top/Black edge/
Platinum frame with casters.
Model Description Wt.
UXL Rectangle Top Table
NF2448_ _ _ _PLT 24"d x 48"w x 30"h 62 lbs.
NF2460_ _ _ _PLT 24"d x 60"w x 30"h 76 lbs.
NF2472_ _ _ _PLT 24"d x 72"w x 30"h 86 lbs.
NF3048_ _ _ _PLT 30"d x 48"w x 30"h 73 lbs.
NF3060_ _ _ _PLT 30"d x 60"w x 30"h 86 lbs.
NF3072_ _ _ _PLT 30"d x 72"w x 30"h
UXL Round Top Table
NF42RD_ _ _ _PLT 42" dia. x 30"h 72 lbs.
NF48RD_ _ _ _PLT 48" dia. x 30"h 86 lbs.
UXL Half Round Top Table
NF60HR_ _ _ _PLT Half of 60" Round 81 lbs.
UXL Quarter Round Top Table
NF48QR_ _ _ _PLT Quarter of 48" Round 81 lbs.
NF60QR_ _ _ _PLT Quarter of 60" Round 73 lbs.
UXL Trap Top Table
NF48TR_ _ _ _PLT 24"d x 48"w x 30"h 69 lbs.
NF60TR_ _ _ _PLT 30"d x 60"w x 30"h 76 lbs.
UXL Nest & Fold 60" Half Round Table
Model NF60HRAMCQPLT
Shown in Amber Cherry top/Chocolate
edge/Platinum frame with casters.
1
2
UXL Nest & Fold Table Choices
CHOOSE LAMINATE COLOR: Amber Cherry (AMC),
Blond Echo (BEC), Cherry (CHE),
Grey Mesh (GME), Grey Nebula (GNB),
Golden Oak (GOK), Maple (MAP),
New Age Oak (NAO), Pewter Mesh (PME),
Tan Echo (TEC).
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR: Apple (A), Black (B),
Blueberry (C), Burgundy (D), Clementine (E),
Forest Green (F), Fuchsia (G), Mint (H), Navy (I),
Persian Blue (J), Purple (K), Red (L), White (M),
Yellow (N), Champagne (O), Platinum (P),
Chocolate (Q).
STANDARD FRAME COLOR: Platinum (PLT).
NF _ _ _ _ _ _ _
1 2
_
PLT
UXL Table
choose laminate color
choose edge color
standard platinum frame
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 254-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
163

UXL
LEG APPENDIX
UXL furniture combines contemporary, lasting
design with an almost limitless array of choices in
appearance and functionality. One of the ways we
achieve this is by offering eight choices of legs on
UXL Tables. Consider these leg choices when it
comes to matching the UXL Table to its intended
environment and purpose.
Straight fixed-height leg
with glide (FL) is standard
in the list price.
For the other legs available
please add:
1. The following prices to
the list price.
2. The 2 digit letter code
to the end of the part #.
Straight
fixed-height
leg with glide
Model FL
Available in Platinum,
this well proportioned
leg measures 2" in
diameter and 29 1 /2"
high.
Add FL
Straight
fixed-height
leg with caster
Model FC
Available in Platinum,
this leg measures 2" in
diameter and 29 1 /2"
high, including its caster
for ideal mobility.
Add FC
164

Push-button
adjustable-height
leg with glide
Model AL
27"-33"h
Model SL
24"-29"h
Available in Platinum,
this leg measures
2" in diameter and
adjusts in height.
27"-33"h
Add AL
Push-button
adjustable-height
leg with caster
Model AC
27"-33"h
Model SC
24"-29"h
Available in Platinum,
this leg measures 2" in
diameter, adjusts in
height and has a caster
for mobility.
27"-33"h
Add AC
Tapered
fixed-height
leg with glide
not shown
Model TG
Tapered
fixed-height
leg with caster
Model TL
Available in Platinum,
this leg tapers from a
2" in diameter at the
top and measures
29 1 /2" high including
its caster.
24"-29"h
Add SL
24"-29"h
Add SC
Glide
Caster
Add TG
Add TL
165

Maximum stability and ergonomics.
Like its namesake, the Acrobat line makes the
most difficult feats look easy, and in the bargain
gives the user a terrific workspace. First,
Acrobat Labs and Teacher Desks provide
rock-solid stability – the kind of stability a user
who spends all day at a desk demands. Second,
the user gets great freedom to move because
Acrobat Labs and Teacher Desks have a cantilever
design that creates the easiest possible ingress
and egress.
These combined strengths make Acrobat
furniture a great choice for any purpose that
requires a strong work surface, extended
work sessions, or frequent movement.
166

ACROBAT 167

ACROBAT classroom/lab
by DesignU
If students need to move about in a lab environment, Acrobat Labs offer the perfect solution because they are
extremely stable and allow easy ingress and egress for students.
For even more access, the Brilliant Adjustable Chairs on casters were selected to help students glide in and
out of their places easily, without disturbing others.
To create alternate floor plans using this furniture visit DesignU at SmithSystem.com
ACROBAT LAB
Combines a strong, stable
work surface and ingenious
wireway to manage cables.
BRILLIANT ADJUSTABLE
CHAIR
Offering comfort, stability
and mobility.
ACROBAT BULLET TEACHER
STATION
Large workspace that’s effective
for lectures and one-on-one
presentations.
168
DELUXE TABLETOP LECTERN
Transforms a desktop into a
lecture space.
BOARDROOM HALF CIRCLE
TABLE
Allows students to work
individually or in a small group.

ACROBAT CLASSROOM itemized
MODEL QUANTITY DESCRIPTION
11811 36 Brilliant Adjustable Chair (Mint)
26522 1 Acrobat Bullet Workstation (Golden Oak/Platinum/Platinum)
04619 1 Tabletop Lectern (Black)
04203 1 Boardroom Half Circle Table (Golden Oak/Platinum/Black)
26526 17 Acrobat Rectangle Workstation (Golden Oak/Platinum/Platinum)
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061
169

ACROBAT
STUDENT DESK
20"x60" Acrobat Rectangle Workstation Model 29283F
Shown in Grey Mesh top with White edge and Platinum frame.
Show with optional UXL Nest & Fold Chairs, see pg. 45.
COMPUTER WORKSTATIONS FOR SCHOOLS.
The strong, stable Acrobat Workstation is available in twelve
different sizes, making it a natural choice for almost any computer
lab. It features a built-in wireway in the modesty panel for cable
management. Its distinctive leg design makes ingress and egress
easier for the students. And Acrobat Workstations can be arranged
and rearranged to fit your changing needs.
20"x30" Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
Model 26280F
Shown in Blond Echo top with White edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chair, see pg. 33.
• Cable tray and port holes in the modesty panel keep
wires neatly organized.
• Strong 10" deep double-wall legs are 18-gauge steel
with radius corners.
• The base is 16-gauge steel, color matched to the legs,
featuring lock-in-place end caps and adjustable
leveling glides.
Acrobat Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
CHOICE 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
CHOICE 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
CHOICE 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
CHOICE 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
CHOICE 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
CHOICE 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 182 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Acrobat Desks.
170
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061

Order an optional
Flat Panel Monitor
Mount, Model
17350
24"x36" Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
Model 26393
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional 3" casters, Model
17553 and optional Flat-Panel Monitor Mount, Model 17350.
Shown with optional Intuit Adjustable Chair, see pg. 35.
24"x72" Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
Model 26380
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Blueberry edge and
Champagne frame*. Shown with optional CPU Holder,
see pg. 183; optional Flat-Panel Monitor Mount, Model
17350 and optional 3" casters, Model 17553.
Shown with optional Intuit Sled Base Chairs, see pg. 34.
Acrobat Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
24"x90" Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
Model 26390F
Shown in Pewter Mesh top with White edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Flavors Chairs, see pg. 26.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
QUICK SHIP
SHIP IN 5 DAYS.
20 PIECES MAXIMUM.
Model Size Wt.
20" deep Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
26280QS 20"d x 30"w x 24-36"h 77 lbs.
26281QS 20"d x 36"w x 24-36"h 83 lbs.
26282QS 20"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 95 lbs.
29283QS 20"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 108 lbs.
26284QS 20"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 116 lbs.
26285QS 20"d x 90"w x 24-36"h 130 lbs.
24" deep Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
26383QS 24"d x 30"w x 24-36"h 82 lbs.
26393QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-36"h 88 lbs.
26403QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 100 lbs.
26413QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 113 lbs.
26380QS 24"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 121 lbs.
26390QS 24"d x 90"w x 24-36"h 143 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Model Description Wt.
Accessories
Mobile Drawer Pedestal — box/box/file
19173QS 15 1 /2"d x 22"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
Surge-Protected Power Strip
17081QS 6-outlet 4 lbs.
17084QS 10-outlet 4 lbs.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553QS set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
Flat-Panel Monitor Mount w/tilt
17350QS
6 lbs.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
171

ACROBAT
TEACHER DESK
T-shape Presentation Board Model 18010
Cork board on one side and magnetic porcelain
white board on three sides. With three surfaces
available, three separate lesson plans may be
prepared ahead of class.
ONE SHAPE ADDED, NOTHING SUBTRACTED.
The solid design of our Acrobat Teacher Desk has been
proven in classrooms across America thanks to ergonomic
details teachers enjoy, like rounded corners on the work
surface and the edge bumper. Still, we found a way to improve
it by adding our versatile Peninsula Breakaway Table.
Acrobat Peninsula Instructor Desk Model 26213
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Drawer Pedestal,
Model 19173. Shown with optional Intuit Adjustable Chair,
see pg. 35.
172
Together, they make a Peninsula Instructor Desk. Separated,
the Peninsula Breakaway Table is perfect for for one-on-one
or one-on-two conferences.
• Durable desktop measures 1 1 /4" thick with a highpressure
laminate surface that resists damage.
• Cable tray and port holes in the modesty panel keep
wires neatly organized.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on
uneven floors.
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061
Model Size Wt.
Acrobat Bullet Workstation - choice 2 not available
26512QS 30"d x 45"w x 24-36"h 92 lbs.
26516QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 110 lbs.
26522QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 115 lbs.
T-shape Presentation Board
18010QS 38"d x 50 3 /4"w x 62"h 89 lbs.
Acrobat Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
CHOICE 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
CHOICE 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
CHOICE 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
CHOICE 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
CHOICE 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
CHOICE 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 182 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Acrobat Desks.

Create a Peninsula Instructor Desk starting
with the Acrobat Rectangle Desk and adding
the Peninsula Breakaway Table.
Acrobat Contour Instructor Desk Model 26203
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Tabletop
Lectern, Model 04619. Optional Drawer Pedestal, Model
19173. Optional Adjustable Library Chair, see pg. 236.
Shown with optional
Flat Panel Monitor
Mount, Model 17353
Acrobat Desk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Acrobat Rectangle Instructor Desk Model 26453
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional casters, Model
17554 and optional Flat-Panel Monitor Mount, Model 17352.
Shown with optional Intuit Adj. Chair, see pg. 35.
Acrobat Bullet Workstation Model 26516
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Clementine edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Intuit
Adjustable Chair, see pg. 35.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
QUICK SHIP
SHIP IN 5 DAYS.
20 PIECES MAXIMUM.
ACCESSORIES
For additional accessories, see pages 182-185.
Mobile Peninsula Breakaway Table Model 26000
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Standard 3" casters. Shown with
optional Intuit Adjustable Chair, see pg. 35.
Model Size Wt.
Acrobat Rectangle Instructor Desk
26443QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 110 lbs.
26453QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 125 lbs.
26526QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 121 lbs.
Acrobat Contour Instructor Desk - choice 2 not available
26203QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 134 lbs.
26223QS 36"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 139 lbs.
Acrobat Peninsula Instructor Desk - choice 2 not available
26213QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 128 lbs.
26233QS 36"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 135 lbs.
Mobile Breakaway Peninsula Table - choice 2 not available
26000QS 48"dia. x 27 3 /4" - 30 3 /4"h 94 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Drawer Pedestal
Box-Box-File
Model 19173QS
File-File
Model 19172QS
Caster Pack
set of 4, 2 locking
3" Dual-Wheel
Model 17553QS
4" Dual-Wheel
Model 17554QS
Tabletop Lectern
20"d x 18"w x 13"h
Model 04619QS
Center Drawer
16"d x 23"w x 2 1 /4"h
Model 17342QS
Flat-Panel Mounts
w/ tilt swivel
Model 17350QS
w/ swing arm, tilt swivel
Model 17352QS
w/ swing arm, tilt swivel
(clamp-on)
Model 17353QS
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
173

LECTERNS
Optional
Personal Book Cart
Model 21085
14"d x 22"w x 24"h
The Dual Surface Lectern (as well as the Curl
Top Lectern) can be mounted with our Bolt-On,
or Clamp-On Mounts, both offer spring loaded,
or swing arm models. All allow height adjustment,
assuring a comfortable reading height for teacher.
174
FOR THE PERFECT
PRESENTATION.
Whether you need a
mobile lectern or a
convenient tabletop
model, these versatile
pieces make a strong
statement in
classrooms, libraries,
meeting rooms and
more.
DUAL SURFACE DESKTOP LECTERN
Model 00471
Its distinctive shape allows the instructor to
reference two sources simultaneously, and
thanks to its rugged steel construction, it can
support a laptop. Mount to tabletop with
either our Clamp-On or Bolt-On Mount.
19"d x 19"w x 6"h
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061
CURL TOP DESKTOP LECTERN
Model 00481
This strong lectern can hold large, heavy
reference materials and thanks to its curl
top design, it can hold large books open.
Mount to tabletop with either our
Clamp-On or Bolt-On Mount.
14.5"d x 19"w x 4"h
Desktop Lecterns
Color Choices
Apple
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Navy
Persian Blue
PlatinumQS
Purple
Red
White
Yellow
QUICK SHIP
SHIP IN 5 DAYS.
40 PIECES MAXIMUM.
All non QS colors are special
order and subject to
standard lead times.

Reference Stand
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Projector Lectern Model 04620
Cart accommodates digital and over-head projectors
alongside its 18" x 20" lectern that can be positioned on
the right or left. Base unit features storage shelf. 16" x 18"
projector area includes rubber mat to steady equipment.
Lectern and base have grommet holes for routing wires.
3" dual wheel casters add mobility (two locking).
Shown in Champagne.
Color Choices: Navy, Black or Champagne
Reference Stand Model 26690
Shown with optional 3" casters. (Order separately,
see pg. 182). Shown in Golden Oak with
Champagne frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
QUICK SHIP
SHIP IN 5 DAYS.
20 PIECES MAXIMUM.
Mobile Lectern
Model 00502
Fully welded heavy-gauge
steel with laminate top,
three storage shelves,
retaining lip on surface,
grommet holes for wires.
3" dual wheel casters for
mobility (two locking).
Shown in Champagne.
Color Choices: Black top
only with frame: Navy,
Black or Champagne
Standup Lectern
Model 00460
All-steel lectern features
storage compartment with
3" high opening. Shown in
Champagne.
Color Choices: Navy,
Champagne or Black.
Model Description Wt.
Dual Surface Desktop Lectern - 19"d x 19"w x 6"h (+ mount)
00470QS w/swing arm (clamp-on) 22 lbs.
00471QS w/swing arm (bolt-on) 25 lbs.
00472QS w/spring loaded swing arm (clamp-on) 23 lbs.
Curl Top Desktop Lectern - 14.5"d x 19"w x 4"h (+ mount)
00480QS w/swing arm (clamp-on) 19 lbs.
00481QS w/swing arm (bolt-on) 22 lbs.
00482QS w/spring loaded swing arm (clamp-on) 20 lbs.
Model Size Wt.
Reference Stand
26690 27"d x 36"w x 48"h 155 lbs.
Projector Lectern
04620QS 18"d x 30"w x 42"h 95 lbs.
Mobile Lectern
00502QS 17"d x 25"w x 44"h 64 lbs.
Standup Lectern
00460QS 12 1 /2"d x 23"w x 46"h 37 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
175

ACROBAT
OFFICE ENSEMBLES
Group One
Shown in Maple work surface, Champagne frame.
Presentation Board
Model 18010
Bookcase
Model 19164
Acrobat Bullet
Model 26515
Acrobat Rectangle
Model 26413
Intuit Chair
Model 00510
Box-Box-File
Pedestal
Model 19173
176
DESKS FOR THE ADMINISTRATION OFFICE, TOO.
We just couldn't confine the functionality and style of
Smith System furniture to the classroom. That's because
administrators have discovered that with a little
accessorization, versatile Acrobat Desks perform admirably
in office situations. Take a look at some of the possible
ways to equip the administrative wing of the school.
Acrobat Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
CHOICE 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
CHOICE 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
CHOICE 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
CHOICE 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
CHOICE 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
CHOICE 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 182 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Acrobat Desks.
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061
Group One
Model Size Wt.
Acrobat Rectangle
26413QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 113 lbs.
Acrobat Bullet - choice 2 not available
26515QS 24"d x 45"w x 24-36"h 92 lbs.
Drawer Pedestal - Box-Box-File
19173QS 15 1 /2"d x 22"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
Bookcase - 2 shelf
19164 12 1 /2"d x 34 1 /2"w x 29"h 52 lbs.
Presentation Board
18010QS 36"d x 48"w x 60"h 89 lbs.
Intuit Chair - stack
00510QS ‘A+’ shell, 18"h 15 lbs.

Group Two
Shown in Maple work surface, Champagne frame.
Acrobat Rectangle
Model 26413
Acrobat Corner
Model 26492
2-Drawer Pedestal
Model 19172
Bookcase
Model 19164
Intuit Adjustable Chair
Model 00531
Acrobat Bullet
Model 26515
Acrobat Desk
Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Group Three
Shown in Cherry work surface, Black frame.
Acrobat Rectangle
Model 26413
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
QUICK SHIP
SHIP IN 5 DAYS.
20 PIECES MAXIMUM.
2-Drawer Pedestal
Model 19172 (two)
Intuit Adjustable Chair
Model 00531
Acrobat Peninsula
Model 26213
Group Two
Model Size Wt.
Acrobat Bullet - choice 2 not available
26515QS 24"d x 45"w x 24-36"h 92 lbs.
Acrobat Corner - choice 2 not available
26492QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 148 lbs.
Acrobat Rectangle
26413QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 113 lbs.
Drawer Pedestals - File-File
19172QS 15 1 /2"d x 22"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
Bookcase - 2 shelf
19164 12 1 /2"d x 34 1 /2"w x 29"h 52 lbs.
Intuit Chair - Mobile adjustable
00531QS 15 1 /2-21"h 27 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Group Three
Model Size Wt.
Acrobat Peninsula - choice 2 not available
26213QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 150 lbs.
Acrobat Rectangle
26413QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 113 lbs.
Two Drawer Pedestals - File-File
19172QS 15 1 /2"d x 22"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
Intuit Chair - Mobile adjustable
00531QS 15 1 /2-21"h 27 lbs.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
177

ACROBAT
COMPUTER STATIONS
24"x90" Acrobat Rectangle Workstation Model 26390F
Shown in Pewter Mesh Top with White edge and Platinum frame.
Shown with optional Flavors Chairs, see pg. 26.
WORKSTATIONS WITH MODULAR VERSATILITY.
Available in five styles, Acrobat Workstations can be used separately
or in dozens of combinations and configurations. Acrobat
Workstations feature wire raceways built into the workstations’
modesty panels. The distinctive Acrobat leg design makes ingress
and egress easier. Schools use Acrobat Workstations in classrooms,
computer labs and administrative offices.
Acrobat Rectangle Workstation Model 26433
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Library Adjustable Chair, see
pg. 237.
178
• Durable desktop measures 1 1 /4" thick with a highpressure
laminate surface that resists damage.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs resists wear.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide stability on floors.
• Optional casters.
• Adjustable desk height, from 24"-36" in 1" increments.
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061
Acrobat Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
CHOICE 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
CHOICE 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
CHOICE 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
CHOICE 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
CHOICE 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
CHOICE 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 182 and 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Acrobat Desks.

Acrobat Desk
Popular Color Choices
Acrobat Rectangle Workstation Model 26453
Shown in Golden Oak top with Black edge and Black
frame. Shown with optional Drawer Pedestal, Model 19173.
Acrobat Corner Workstation Model 26492
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Charcoal edge and
Black frame.
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Model Size Wt.
Acrobat Rectangle Workstation
26383QS 24"d x 30"w x 24-36"h 82 lbs.
26393QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-36"h 88 lbs.
26403QS 24"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 100 lbs.
26413QS 24"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 113 lbs.
26390QS 24"d x 90"w x 24-36"h 145 lbs.
26423QS 30"d x 30"w x 24-36"h 88 lbs.
26433QS 30"d x 36"w x 24-36"h 95 lbs.
26443QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 110 lbs.
26453QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-36"h 125 lbs.
26526QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-36"h 140 lbs.
Acrobat Corner Riser Shelf Model 17601
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and
Navy frame.
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
QUICK SHIP
SHIP IN 5 DAYS.
20 PIECES MAXIMUM.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553QS set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
4" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17554QS set of 4, 2 locking 5 lbs.
Acrobat Corner Workstation — 5 sided - choice 2 not available
26492QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-36"h 148 lbs.
26493QS 24"d x 42"w x 24-36"h 127 lbs.
26494QS 24"d x 36"w x 24-36"h 106 lbs.
Acrobat Corner Riser Shelf - choice 2 not available
17469QS 12"d x 48"w x 12-22"h 67 lbs.
17601QS 12"d x 36"w x 12-22"h 49 lbs.
17603QS 12"d x 42"w x 12-22"h 59 lbs.
Acrobat Leg Riser Shelf
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17645QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 31 lbs.
17646QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17647QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 39 lbs.
17648QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 50 lbs.
17649QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 56 lbs.
17657QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 78 lbs.
17659QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 99 lbs.
Mobile Drawer Pedestal — File-File
19172QS 22"d x 15 1 /2"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
Mobile Drawer Pedestal — Box-Box-File
19173QS 22"d x 15 1 /2"w x 24 1 /2"h 50 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
179

ACROBAT
CREATE A CUSTOM WORKSTATION
To make a workstation that works, just start with elements from the
Acrobat line. Acrobat desktops come in a variety of shapes – including
bullets, peninsulas and corners – that you can configure to meet your
needs and optimize your space.
Acrobat Rectangle
Model 26413
2-Drawer Pedestal
Model 19172
Bookcase
Model 19164
Intuit Adjustable Chair
Model 00531
180
Drawer Pedestal Model 19173
Shown in Champagne.
Acrobat Peninsula Workstation Model 26213
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and frame.
Viking Chair Model 02600
Shown in Golden Oak with Champagne frame.
*This basic workstation gains functionality thanks to the peninsula
shape of the desktop – it promotes small group meetings.
SMITHSYSTEM.COM | 800.328.1061
Acrobat Rectangular Workstation Model 26453
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Charcoal edge band and
Platinum frame.
*Acrobat Workstations offer easy ingress and egress thanks
to their cantilever design. Cable ports and an integrated wire
management system keep the workstation tidy. For color
samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-255.

Acrobat Corner
Model 26492
Acrobat Bullet
Model 26515
Acrobat Corner Workstation Model 26492
Shown in Wild Cherry with Black edge and Black frame
*Acrobat Corner units transform corners into productive and
comfortable work spaces.
Acrobat Bullet Workstation Model 26522
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Clementine edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional 3" Casters
and Flat Panel Monitor Mount, Model 17353.
Order separately.
*The bullet shape allows this Acrobat Workstation to
enable both individual and small-group tasks.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
181

ACROBAT
ACCESSORIES
WHAT’S YOUR PROFILE?
Available in 1 1 /4" thick top and
three edge choice treatments.
Our edge band treatments give
the choice of crisp, clean
90-degree angles, or the
curved, gentle profile of bullet
or bumper edges.
F
CHOICE 1
CHOICE 2
Bumper
T-Mold
3mm Edge
H
3mm T-Mold
DRAWER CABINETS
With locks and 2"h drawers.
Color Choices: Black or Champagne.
CHOICE 3
6 Drawer Cabinet
21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 22"h
Wt. 54 lbs.
Model 09350QS
12 Drawer Cabinet
21 1 /2"d x 15 1 /2"w x 39"h
Wt. 104 lbs.
Model 09450QS
PULL-OUT KNEE
DRAWER
Black molded drawer
mounts under work
surface. Molded
pencil area 19"d.
16"d x 23"w x 2"h
Model 17342QS
MOBILE DRAWER PEDESTAL
Cabinets have steel welded construction with rounded
corners and gang lock. Drawers have flush pulls and ball
bearing race slides. All mobile units have 2" dual wheel
casters. Colors: Champagne, Platinum, Black or Navy.
22"d x 15 1 /2"w x 24 1 /2"h, Wt. 50 lbs.
File/File
Model 19172QS
Box/Box/File
Model 19173QS
CASTERS
Casters have 3 /16" x
18 threaded stem.
4 pack of 3" dual wheel
casters, Wt. 3 lbs.
Model 17553QS
4 pack of 4" dual wheel
casters, Wt. 5 lbs.
Model 17554QS
POLE LEG RISER SHELF - Clamp-On Pole (Platinum only)
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17665QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 26 lbs.
17666QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 29 lbs.
17667QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17668QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 45 lbs.
17669QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 51 lbs.
17677QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 73 lbs.
17679QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 94 lbs.
17680QS 12"d x 90"w x 12"h 106 lbs.
ACROBAT LEG RISER SHELF
1 1 /4" thick top with bumper edge.
Model Description Wt.
17645QS 12"d x 24"w x 12"h 31 lbs.
17646QS 12"d x 30"w x 12"h 34 lbs.
17647QS 12"d x 36"w x 12"h 39 lbs.
17648QS 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 50 lbs.
17649QS 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 56 lbs.
17657QS 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 78 lbs.
17659QS 12"d x 84"w x 12"h 99 lbs.
182

LAPTOP CART
SECURE TRANSPORT AND STORAGE.
Constructed of 18-gauge steel, our Laptop Cart rolls smoothly on
4" casters. It stores, transports and charges 15 laptops. Much more
than a shelf on wheels, our Laptop Cart offers great functionality and
security as well as convenience — you can use it to recharge the
laptops' batteries. The cart locks for security and offers ventilation
holes to prevent damaging heat from building up inside.
• Platinum powdercoat with Black rubber mat.
• Locking front doors swing open a full 270 degrees to make
loading and unloading the laptops easier.
• Ventilation holes prevent damaging heat from building up inside.
• 14 removable dividers.
• 10' extension cord
• Two 1 1 /2" grommet holes on top shelf and one in the rear access
panel.
• Locking rear electrical access panel.
Model Description Wt.
26100QS 22"d x 36"w x 40"h 140 lbs.
183

TILT MOUNT
Wt. 6 lbs.
Model 17350 QS
TILT & SWIVEL
MOUNT
Wt. 7 lbs.
Model 17351QS
FLAT-PANEL
MONITOR
MOUNTS
FOR DESKS
AND TABLES
Height adjustable
to optimize user
ergonomics, choose
either Bolt-On or
Clamp-On models,
with or without
swing arms.
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 8 lbs.
Model 17352QS
SPRING LOADED
MOUNT
Tilt & swivel.
Wt.11 lbs.
Model 17655 PLT QS
CLAMP STYLE
SWING-OUT ARM
Tilt & swivel.
Wt. 11 lbs.
Model 17353QS
184

ACROBAT
ACCESSORIES CONT’D
DESKTOP TABLETOP
LECTERN
Plastic laminate top with pencil
groove and large storage area
for reference materials.
Color Choices: Black top with
choice of Black, Navy or
Champagne frame.
SIDE BOOKBOX
LAPTOP HOLDER
Black powdercoat finish.
Special order Champagne
and Platinum.
12"d x 8"w x 16"h Wt. 10 lbs.
Model 17194QS
20"d x 18"w x 13"h Wt. 21 lbs.
Model 04619QS
10 OUTLET SURGE PROTECTOR
15 ft. heavy duty cord Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 17084QS
(Has surge protection and noise filter.)
• Surge Protection up to
720 Joules
• Illuminated On/Off
switch and Diagnostic
Indicator
• Integrated 15-amp
breaker
• Integrated keyhole slots
on back for optional
wall mount
6 OUTLET SURGE PROTECTOR
4 ft. heavy duty cord Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 17081QS
CPU HOLDERS
Heavy steel plate mounts under work surface.
Adjusts 7-10" wide and 17-21" high. Black steel tube
frame with locks to hold tower in place.
13"d x 7"w x 16"h Wt. 12 lbs.
Model 17213QS
Note: 3-student stations will not accommodate three
CPU tower holders.
ADJUSTABLE KEYBOARDS
Features 6" height adjustment with 10° tilt and 180° swivel
with easy single control. 11"d x 25"w steel tray has padded
palm rest.
17"d x 22"w x 6"h Wt. 20 lbs.
Model 17620QS
185

Two emerging trends in education are driving the
need for our new Cascade Storage system that
allows educators to more effectively organize, store
and distribute learning materials.
The roots of the first emerged long ago when
educators discovered that visual aids made lectures
more effective by engaging the students’ sense of
sight in addition to hearing. Today, educators are
recognizing that tactile, three-dimensional learning
aids or “manipulatives” go a step further, engaging
not just the students’ senses of hearing and sight,
but of touch as well.
The second trend in education is away from the
traditional reliance on textbooks and workbooks and
toward project packets that are often made up of
loose worksheets, data sheets and manipulatives.
The reasons educators need Cascade Storage are:
Between uses, manipulatives simply don’t fit in nice,
flat file folders, or stay obediently on shelves. If not
protected, they collect dust. They’re expensive to
replace. And schools can’t afford redundancy in
materials, so the manipulatives must be easily found
and shared by all the educators who may need them.
Manipulatives require the space-efficient, organized,
three-dimensional storage capability available only
with the Cascade Storage system. Read on to see
how this comprehensive concept works.
186

CASCADE 187

CASCADE OVERVIEW
COMPREHENSIVE ORGANIZATION AND STORAGE SOLUTION
Every day, elementary educators use more and more three-dimensional teaching
aids and “manipulatives” in the classroom. Curricula based on project
packets rather than text and workbooks are also gaining greater and greater
acceptance. Both of these trends pose an unmet challenge to educators: How
are you going to keep everything organized? We confidently recommend the
Cascade Storage system.
TOTE TRAY STORAGE
Teachers organize class materials into Totes, often
by subject or lesson, or a Tote can be assigned to an
individual student. Totes are organized in Storage
Units; we recommend a Storage Unit in each classroom
for quick access to items used in that day’s or week’s
lessons in addition to a bank of Storage Units in a
central location, for storage when the items are not
needed for a lesson. In the classroom, the Totes are
accessed as needed either by the teacher or the
students. For added flexibility, the student desks can
be outfitted with rails
that hold an EW Tote.
SHELF STORAGE
Cascade Shelf Storage Units complement Cascade
Tote Tray Storage Units in both function and design.
From a functional standpoint, Cascade Shelf Storage
Units provide optimum storage for everyday
classroom resources like reference books, globes and
the like by offering easy access to all. From the design
standpoint, Cascade Shelf Storage Units mirror the
shapes and colors of Cascade Tote Tray Storage Units
and so, promote design harmony within the classroom.
188 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

WARDROBE CABINETS
Cascade Wardrobe Units offer multi-purpose functionality.
They give the teacher a place to hang his or her coat, as
well as offering a variety of Tote Trays for storing learning
materials of various sizes and shapes. Cascade Wardrobe
Units also mirror the design of Cascade Storage and Tote
Storage Units.
PRESENTATION CARTS
To get an idea of just how versatile and adaptable
the Cascade line is, consider Cascade Presentation
Carts. At their core, you’ll find a Cascade Tote Tray or
Shelf Storage Cabinet or Case. To transform it into an
optimized Presentation Cart, we outfitted it with a riser
shelf, mount and lectern. Our wide variety of models
allow you to choose the one that best meets your
school’s needs for presenting information.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 258-259.
189

CASCADE
CASE SHELF STORAGE
COMPACT, VERSATILE SHELVING UNITS.
Available in Mini, Mid and Mega widths,
Cascade Case Shelf Storage Units are
29 1 /2" tall and provide storage for a wide
range of items. As part of a comprehensive
organization, storage and distribution solution
for classroom materials and learning aids,
Cascade Case Shelf Storage Units are the
perfect companion to Cascade Tote Tray
Storage Units. Built with Smith System’s
emphasis on functionality, durability and style,
Cascade Case Shelf Storage Units offer:
• Comes standard in Platinum.
Optional Designer End Panels available
in thirteen colors.
• Welded 18-gauge steel construction,
protected with durable powdercoat surface.
• Adjustable shelf.
• Models 21", 28 5 /8", 42 5 /8"w to choose from.
Cascade Mini-Case Model 30011
shown in optional Clementine
End Panels
CHOOSE A RISER SHELF
AND LOCKABLE DOORS.
Adding optional accessories
adds functionality to
Cascade Cabinets. Doors
open 270˚, flush with
the End Panels, allowing
unobstructed access.
Cascade Mid-Case Model
30114 shown in Platinum
with Lockable Doors
and Riser Shelf
190 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE CASES:
THE PERFECT
PLATFORM FOR
PRESENTATION
CARTS.
Outfitted with a Riser
Shelf, mount, Curl Top
Lectern and Locking
Doors, this Cascade
Case lets the instructor
work with printed and
electronic media, while
providing secure storage.
QUICK ORDER GUIDE
Here are three configurations of Cascade Case
Shelf Storage. If you’d prefer a combination of
shelves not shown here, a Smith System dealer
can help you order just what you need.
Mini-Case
21"w x 19"d x 29 1 /2"h
30011 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Open w/ Shelf
30012 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Door w/ Shelf
30013 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Open w/ Shelf & Riser Shelf
30014 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Door w/ Shelf & Riser Shelf
Apple
Black
Blueberry
Burgundy
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Navy
Persian Blue
Purple
Red
Yellow
Cascade Mid-Case Model 30114
shown in Platinum with
Locking Doors, Riser Shelf,
optional mount and Curl Top
Lectern Model 00481 see pg. 106
Available Options:
• Glides
• Bolt-on Riser shelf with choice of
Laminate Top finishes and T-Mold
colors
• Locking Single Door, available on
Mini- model
• Locking Double Doors, available on
Mid- and Mega- models
Designer End Panel and Door Handle
Color Options:
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Mid-Case
28 5 /8"w x 19"d x 29 1 /2"h
30111 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Open w/ Shelf
30112 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ Shelf
30113 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Open w/ Shelf & Riser Shelf
30114 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ Shelf & Riser Shelf
Mega-Case
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 29 1 /2"h
30211 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Open w/ shelves
30212 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ shelves
30213 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Open w/ shelves & riser
30214 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ shelves & riser
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
191

CASCADE
CABINET SHELF STORAGE
MULTI-FUNCTIONAL SHELVING UNITS.
Available in Mini, Mid and Mega widths,
Cascade Cabinet Shelf Storage Units are
42 3 /8" tall and provide storage for items
ranging from reference books to globes. As
part of a comprehensive organization, storage
and distribution solution for classroom
materials and learning aids, Cascade Cabinet
Shelf Storage Units are the perfect companion
to Cascade Tote Tray Storage cabinets.
Built with Smith System’s emphasis on
functionality, durability and style, Cascade
Cabinet Shelf Storage Units offer:
• Comes standard in Platinum.
Optional Designer End Panels available
in thirteen colors.
• Welded 18-gauge steel construction,
protected with durable powdercoat surface.
• Two adjustable shelves.
• Models 21", 28 5 /8", 42 5 /8"w to choose from.
Cascade Mega-Cabinet Model 30511
shown in optional Persian Blue End Panels
Cascade Mega-Cabinet with
Riser Shelf Model 30513 shown in
optional Persian Blue End Panels
and Keyboard Tray Model 17620
192 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE CABINETS: THE
PERFECT PLATFORM FOR
PRESENTATION CARTS.
Outfitted with a Riser Shelf,
mount, Lectern and Locking
Double Doors, this Cascade
Cabinet lets the instructor work
with printed and electronic
media, while providing secure
storage. Doors open 270˚, flush
with the End Panels, allowing
unobstructed access.
Cascade Mid-Cabinet with Riser Shelf and
Locking Double Doors Model 30414 shown
in Platinum with optional Curl Top Lectern
Model 00481 and mount see pg. 108.
QUICK ORDER GUIDE
Here are three configurations of Cascade Cabinet
Shelf Storage. If you’d prefer a combination of
shelves not shown here, a Smith System dealer can
help you order just what you need.
Mini-Cabinet
21"w x 19"d x 42 3 /8"h
30311 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ Shelves
30312 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Door w/ Shelves
30313 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ Shelves
& Riser Shelf
30314 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Door w/ Shelves
& Riser Shelf
Cascade Mid-Cabinet with Riser Shelf and
Locking Double Doors Model 30414
CHOOSE A
RISER SHELF AND
LOCKABLE DOORS.
Adding optional
accessories adds
functionality to
Cascade Cabinets.
Doors open 270˚,
flush with the End
Panels, allowing
unobstructed access.
Mid-Cabinet
28 5 /8"w x 19"d x 42 3 /8"h
30411 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ Shelves
30412 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ Shelves
30413 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ Shelves
& Riser Shelf
30414 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ Shelves
& Riser Shelf
Mega-Cabinet
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 42 3 /8"h
30511 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ Shelves
30512 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ Shelves
30513 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ Shelves
& Riser Shelf
30514 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ Shelves
& Riser Shelf
Available Options:
• Glides
• Bolt-on Riser shelf with choice of
Laminate Top finishes and T-Mold colors
• Locking Single Door, available on
Mini- model
• Locking Double Doors, available on
Mid- and Mega- models
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Designer End Panel and Door Handle
Color Options:
Apple, Black, Blueberry, Burgundy,
Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia,
Mint, Navy, Persian Blue, Purple, Red,
Yellow
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
193

CASCADE
TOWER SHELF STORAGE
HIGH CAPACITY, MOBILE SHELVING UNITS.
Available in Mini, Mid and Mega widths, Cascade Tower Shelf Storage
Units are 60 1 /4" tall and provide efficient use of floor space for
housing items ranging from reference books to globes. As part of
a comprehensive organization, storage and distribution solution for
classroom materials and learning aids, Cascade Tower Shelf Storage
Units are the perfect companion to Cascade Tote Tray Storage Units.
Built with Smith System’s emphasis on functionality, durability and
style, Cascade Tower Shelf Storage Units offer:
• Comes standard in Platinum.
Optional Designer End Panels available in thirteen colors.
• Welded 18-gauge steel construction,
protected with durable powdercoat surface.
• Three adjustable shelves.
• Models 21", 28 5 /8", 42 5 /8"w to choose from.
Adding optional accessories adds functionality
An optional Riser Shelf can be a work surface or place for learning
materials to reside. Optional Doors open
270˚, flush with the End Panels, allowing
unobstructed access.
Cascade Mega-Tower Model 30811
shown in optional Mint End Panels
QUICK ORDER GUIDE
Here are three configurations of Cascade Tower Shelf
Storage Units. If you’d prefer a combination of shelves
not shown here, a Smith System dealer can help you
order just what you need.
Mid-Tower
28 5 /8"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h
30711 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Open w/Shelves
30712 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/Shelves
30713 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Open w/Shelves
& Riser Shelf
30714 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/Shelves
& Riser Shelf
Mini-Tower
21"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h
30611 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Open w/Shelves
30612 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Door w/Shelves
30613 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Open w/Shelves
& Riser Shelf
30614 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Door w/Shelves
& Riser Shelf
Mega-Tower
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h
30811 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Open w/Shelves
30812 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/Shelves
30813 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Open w/Shelves
& Riser Shelf
30814 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/Shelves
& Riser Shelf
194 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE TOWER WARDROBE
CASCADE TOWER WARDROBE
with 3", 6" and 12"h Totes
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h shown at right
Use "L" or "R" after 5-digit part number to
designate placement of the shelf on the left
or right side of the wardrobe.
30920 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Open w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes
30921 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Doors w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes
30922 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Open w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30923 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Doors w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Adding optional accessories adds functionality
An optional Riser Shelf can be a work surface or place for
learning materials to reside. Optional Doors open 270˚,
flush with the End Panels, allowing unobstructed access.
Cascade Tower Wardrobe
with all 3"h SW Totes
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h shown below
Use "L" or "R" after 5-digit part number to
designate placement of the shelf on the left or right
side of the wardrobe.
30912 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Open
w/ twenty-four 3" SW Totes
30913 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Doors
w/ twenty-four 3" SW Totes
30914 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Open
w/ twenty-four 3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30915 Cascade Wardrobe
(Casters) Doors
w/ twenty-four 3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Cascade Tower Wardrobe
Model 30920L shown in Platinum
Available Options:
• Glides
• Bolt-on Riser shelf with choice of
Laminate Top finishes and T-Mold colors
• Locking Single Door, available on
Mini- model
• Locking Double Doors, available on
Mid- and Mega- models
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Designer End Panel and Door Handle
Color Options:
Apple, Black, Blueberry, Burgundy,
Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia,
Mint, Navy, Persian Blue, Purple, Red,
Yellow
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
195

CASCADE
CASE TOTE TRAY STORAGE
COMPACT, VERSATILE
CLASSROOM STORAGE.
Available in Mini, Mid and Mega widths, Cascade
Case Tote Tray Storage Units are 29 1 /2" tall and
offer great flexibility. Part of a comprehensive
organization, storage and distribution solution
for classroom materials and learning aids,
Cascade Case Tote Tray Storage Units house bins
that can contain anything from manipulatives
to art materials to individual students’ school
work. Cascade Case Tote Tray Storage Units
can be outfitted with Riser Shelves for added
functionality. They all offer:
• Comes standard in Platinum.
Optional Designer End Panels available in
thirteen colors.
• Welded 18-gauge steel construction, protected
with durable powdercoat surface.
• Models 21", 28 5 /8", 42 5 /8"w to choose from.
• The clear Totes made of durable, recyclable
ABS plastic, allow the contents to be easily
identified.
Cascade Mid-Case
Model 30151 shown in
optional Fuchsia End
Panels
Planner
student desk
Model 01272V
shown with
optional Tote
Tray with
Housing
Model 30926
see pg. 120.
CHOOSE A
RISER SHELF
Adding optional
accessories adds
functionality to
Cascade Case Tote
Tray Storage Units.
THE TOTE TRAY SYSTEM
The clear Totes can be transferred under
student desks to organize teaching materials.
The 3" EW Totes can be used under selected
desks; Silhouette, Planner Rectangles, Flexline
Arc. See pg. 120.
Totes come in five different sizes:
(SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 3"h
(SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 6"h (SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 12"h (EW) 18 3 /8"w x 16 5 /8"d x 3"h (EW) 18 3 /8"w x 16 5 /8"d x 6"h
196 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE CASES
LEND THEMSELVES
TO MULTIPLE USES.
Outfitted with a Riser Shelf, mount and Curl Top Lectern, this Cascade
Mini-Case lets the instructor work with printed and electronic media.
QUICK ORDER GUIDE
Here are six configurations of Cascade Case Tote Storage. If you’d prefer a combination of
Totes not shown here, a Smith System dealer can help you order just what you need.
Mini-Case
21"w x 19"d x 29 1 /2"h
30051 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Open w/ three 3",
one 6" EW Totes
30052 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Door w/ three 3",
one 6" EW Totes
30053 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Open w/ three 3", one
6" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30054 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Door w/ three 3" one
6" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30031 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Open
w/ five 3" EW Totes
30032 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Door
w/ five 3" EW Totes
30033 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Open w/ five
3" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30034 Cascade Mini-Case
(Casters) Door w/ five
3" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30131 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Open
w/ ten 3" SW Totes
30132 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Doors
w/ ten 3" SW Totes
30133 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Open w/ ten
3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30134 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ ten
3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mid-Case
28 5 /8"w x 19"d x 29 1 /2"h
30151 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Open w/ six 3",
two 6" SW Totes
30152 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ six 3",
two 6" SW Totes
30153 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Open w/ six 3", two
6" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30154 Cascade Mid-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ six 3", two
6" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mega-Case
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 29 1 /2"h
Available Options:
• Glides
• Bolt-on Riser shelf with choice of
Laminate Top finishes and T-Mold
colors
• Locking Single Door, available on
Mini- model
• Locking Double Doors, available on
Mid- and Mega- models
30271 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Open
w/ ten 3" EW totes
30272 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Doors
w/ ten 3" EW totes
30273 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Open w/ ten
3" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30274 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ ten
3" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30231 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Open w/ fifteen
3" SW Totes
30232 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ fifteen
3" SW Totes
30233 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Open w/ fifteen
3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30234 Cascade Mega-Case
(Casters) Doors w/ fifteen
3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Designer End Panel and Door Handle
Color Options:
Apple
Black
Blueberry
Burgundy
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Navy
Persian Blue
Purple
Red
Yellow
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
197

CASCADE
CABINET TOTE TRAY STORAGE
CLASSROOM STORAGE WITH
ADDED FUNCTIONALITIES.
Available in Mini, Mid and Mega widths, Cascade
Cabinet Tote Tray Storage Units are 42 3 /8" tall and offer
great capacity and flexibility. Part of a comprehensive
organization, storage and distribution solution for
classroom materials and learning aids, Cascade
Cabinet Tote Tray Storage Units house bins that can
contain anything from manipulatives to art materials to
individual students’ school work. Cascade Cabinet Tote
Tray Storage Units can be outfitted with Riser Shelves
for added functionality. They all offer:
• Comes standard in Platinum.
Optional Designer End Panels available in
thirteen colors.
• Welded 18-gauge steel construction, protected
with durable powdercoat surface.
• Models 21", 28 5 /8", 42 5 /8"w to choose from.
• The clear Totes made of durable, recyclable
ABS plastic, allow the contents to be easily
identified.
Cascade Mid-Cabinet
with Locking Doors
Model 30452 shown in
Platinum
Planner
student desk
Model 01272V
shown with
optional Tote
Tray with
Housing
Model 30926
see pg. 120.
CHOOSE A RISER SHELF
AND LOCKABLE DOORS.
Adding optional accessories
adds functionality to Cascade
Cabinets. Doors open 270˚, flush
with the End Panels, allowing
unobstructed access.
THE TOTE TRAY SYSTEM
The clear Totes can be transferred under
student desks to organize teaching materials.
The 3" EW Totes can be used under selected
desks; Silhouette, Planner Rectangles, Flexline
Arc. See page 120.
Totes come in five different sizes:
(SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 3"h
(SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 6"h (SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 12"h (EW) 18 3 /8"w x 16 5 /8"d x 3"h (EW) 18 3 /8"w x 16 5 /8"d x 6"h
198 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

CASCADE CABINETS: THE PERFECT PLATFORM FOR PRESENTATION CARTS.
Outfitted with a Riser Shelf, mount, Curl Top Lectern and lockable doors,
this Cascade Cabinet lets the instructor work with printed and electronic media,
while providing secure storage.
QUICK ORDER GUIDE
Here are six configurations of Cascade Case Tote Storage. If you’d prefer a combination
of Totes not shown here, a Smith System dealer can help you order just what you need.
30351 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ four 3",
two 6" EW Totes
30352 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Door w/ four 3",
two 6" EW Totes
30353 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ four 3", two
6" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30354 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Door w/ four 3", two
6" EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30451 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ eight 3",
four 6" SW Totes
30452 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ eight 3",
four 6" SW Totes
30453 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ eight 3", four 6"
SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30454 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ eight 3", four 6"
SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mini-Cabinet
21"w x 19"d x 42 3 /8"h
Mid-Cabinet
28 5 /8"w x 19"d x 42 3 /8"h
30331 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Open
w/ eight 3" EW Totes
30332 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Door
w/ eight 3" EW Totes
30333 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ eight 3"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30334 Cascade Mini-Cabinet
(Casters) Door w/ eight 3"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30431 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Open
w/sixteen 3" SW Totes
30432 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors
w/sixteen 3" SW Totes
30433 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/sixteen 3"
SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30434 Cascade Mid-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/sixteen 3"
SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mega-Cabinet
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 42 3 /8"h
30571 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ sixteen
3" EW Totes
30572 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ sixteen
3" EW Totes
30573 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ sixteen 3" EW
Totes & Riser Shelf
30574 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ sixteen 3" EW
Totes & Riser Shelf
30530 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ twenty four 3"
SW Totes
30531 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ twenty four 3"
SW Totes
30532 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Open w/ twenty four 3"
SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30533 Cascade Mega-Cabinet
(Casters) Doors w/ twenty four 3"
SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Available Options:
• Glides
• Bolt-on Riser shelf with choice of
Laminate Top finishes and T-Mold colors
• Locking Single Door, available on
Mini- model
• Locking Double Door, available on
Mid- and Mega- models
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Designer End Panel and Door Handle
Color Options:
Apple, Black, Blueberry, Burgundy,
Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia,
Mint, Navy, Persian Blue, Purple, Red,
Yellow.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
199

CASCADE
TOWER TOTE TRAY STORAGE
Maximum capacity
classroom storage.
Available in Mini, Mid and Mega widths, Cascade
Tower Tote Tray Storage Units are 60 1 /4" tall
and offer great capacity and flexibility. Part
of a comprehensive organization, storage and
distribution solution for classroom materials and
learning aids, Cascade Tower Tote Tray Storage
Units house bins that can contain anything
from manipulatives to art materials to individual
students’ school work. Built with Smith System’s
emphasis on functionality, durability and style,
Cascade Tower Tote Tray Storage Units can be
outfitted with Riser Shelves for added functionality.
They all offer:
• Comes standard in Platinum.
Optional Designer End Panels available in
thirteen colors.
• Welded 18-gauge steel construction, protected
with durable powdercoat surface.
• Models 21", 28 5 /8", 42 5 /8"w to choose from.
• The clear Totes made of durable, recyclable
ABS plastic allow the contents to be easily
identified.
Arc student
desk Model
01351V shown
with optional
Tote Tray
with Housing
Model 30926
see pg. 132.
Cascade Mega-Tower
Model 30891 shown in
optional Mint End Panels
THE TOTE TRAY SYSTEM
The clear Totes can be transferred under student
desks to organize teaching materials.
The 3" EW Totes can be used under selected
desks; Silhouette, Planner Rectangles, Flexline Arc.
Totes come in five different sizes:
(SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 3"h
(SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 6"h (SW) 12 1 /4"w x 16 3 /4"d x 12"h (EW) 18 3 /8"w x 16 5 /8"d x 3"h (EW) 18 3 /8"w x 16 5 /8"d x 6"h
200 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

QUICK ORDER GUIDE
Here are six configurations of Cascade Case Tote Storage. If you’d prefer a combination
of Totes not shown here, a Smith System dealer can help you order just what you need.
30630 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Open
w/ twelve 3" EW Totes
30631 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Door
w/ twelve 3" EW Totes
30632 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ twelve 3"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30633 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Door w/ twelve 3"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mini-Tower
21"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h
30651 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ three 3",
five 6" EW Totes
30652 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Door w/ three 3",
five 6" EW Totes
30653 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ three 3", five 6"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30654 Cascade Mini-Tower
(Casters) Door w/ three 3", five 6"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30730 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Open
w/ twenty-four 3" SW Totes
30731 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Doors
w/ twenty-four 3" SW Totes
30732 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ twenty-four
3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30733 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/ twenty-four
3" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mid-Tower
28 5 /8"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h
30751 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes
30752 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes
30753 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30754 Cascade Mid-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/ six 3", six 6",
two 12" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30891 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ twenty-four 3"
EW Totes
30892 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/ twenty-four 3"
EW Totes
30893 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Open w/ twenty-four 3"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
30894 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/ twenty-four 3"
EW Totes & Riser Shelf
Mega-Tower
42 5 /8"w x 19"d x 60 1 /4"h
30871 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Open w/nine 3", nine 6",
three 12" SW Totes
30872 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/nine 3", nine 6",
three 12" SW Totes
30873 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Open w/nine 3", nine 6", three
12" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
30874 Cascade Mega-Tower
(Casters) Doors w/nine 3", nine 6", three
12" SW Totes & Riser Shelf
Adding optional accessories adds functionality
An optional Riser Shelf can be a work surface or place for
learning materials to reside. Optional Doors open 270˚,
flush with the End Panels, allowing unobstructed access.
Available Options:
• Glides
• Bolt-on Riser shelf with choice of
Laminate Top finishes and T-Mold colors
• Locking Single Door, available on
Mini- model
• Locking Double Door, available on
Mid- and Mega- models
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Designer End Panel and Door Handle
Color Options:
Apple, Black, Blueberry, Burgundy,
Clementine, Forest Green, Fuchsia,
Mint, Navy, Persian Blue, Purple, Red,
Yellow.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
201

Created expressly to meet the needs of the
youngest learners.
When considering the needs of Pre-K students,
properly sizing the furniture to their dimensions
is key. But there’s more. Pre-K students have
additional needs that set them apart from older
students. For one, research indicates that color is
essential for early childhood rooms. For another,
Pre-K students react positively to having their own
space at a table. That’s why we’ve created options
in our Pre-K tables that offer well defined places
for students.
Throughout our line of early childhood furniture,
you’ll find solutions that help make the
introduction to learning a pleasant, stimulating
and fun experience.
202

EARLY CHILDHOOD
203

HUSKY
CHAIRS & TABLES
Size Chart for Chairs and Tables
Chair Height 9 1 /2"h 11 1 /2"h 13 1 /2"h
Table Height ~19" ~22" ~24"
3 – 4 year olds 50% 50%
Kindergarten 50% 50%
Grade 1 100%
Clover Husky Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Mint edge and Mint
frame. Shown with optional Husky Chairs, Model 00807.
Stack Chair and Table for Early Childhood Rooms.
Whether it's Husky Chairs or Tables, the story is told by the largediameter
tubular legs: Sturdiness, stability and a sense of fun. The
chairs are full of subtle features that are especially applicable for
Pre-K students, like no-show rivets that won't snag hair and clothing
and a compound contour shell that encourages proper posture. The
matching tables allow you to complete the classroom with consistent
colors and design themes.
• Narrow top allows shoulders to move freely.
• No-show rivets won't catch hair and clothing.
• Waterfall front edge allows transition for legs and no pressure points.
• Compound contour encourages proper posture.
• Husky legs are 1 1 /2" diameter, 18-gauge steel tubing.
• Cross brace is 1" diameter, 18-gauge steel.
204 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Husky stacks six high.

Square Husky Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Blueberry edge and Blueberry
frame. Shown with optional Husky Chairs, Model 00808.
Rectangle Husky Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Clementine edge
and Clementine frame. Shown with optional Husky
Chairs, Model 00805, see pg. 52.
Husky Table
Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Flower Husky Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Purple edge and Purple
frame. Shown with optional Husky Chairs, Model 00808.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Husky Stacking Chairs
00807QS chrome legs 13 1 /2" 10 lbs.
00808QS chrome legs 11 1 /2" 10 lbs.
00809QS chrome legs 9 1 /2" 10 lbs.
Model Top Size Wt.
Rectangle Husky Activity Tables, 15"-24"h
04301QS 24" x 60" 66 lbs.
04306QS 30" x 48" 66 lbs.
04311QS 30" x 60" 79 lbs.
04321QS 30" x 72" 91 lbs.
04361QS 36" x 72" 106 lbs.
Trapezoid Husky Activity Table, 15"-24"h
04351QS 30" x 60" 61 lbs.
Round Husky Activity Tables, 15"-24"h
04326QS 42" dia. 66 lbs.
04331QS 48" dia. 79 lbs.
04336QS 60" dia. 116 lbs.
Square Husky Activity Table, 15"-24"h
04371QS 48” x 48” 96 lbs.
Kidney Husky Activity Table, 15"-24"h
04341QS 48” x 72” 120 lbs.
Clover Husky Activity Table, 15"-24"h
04381QS 48” dia. 76 lbs.
Flower Husky Activity Table, 15"-24"h
04391QS 60” dia. 110 lbs.
Husky is protected by US patents.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Husky Stacking Chair
Model 00806, see pg. 52.
Shown in Blueberry.
Husky Chair
Color Choices
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
MintQS
NavyQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
quick ship
CHAIRS Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
TABLES Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Clementine
FRAME Clementine
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Mint
FRAME Mint
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Blueberry
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Forest Green
FRAME Forest Green
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Purple
FRAME Purple
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Red
FRAME Red
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
205

3-2-1
DESK
3-2-1 Desk Model 03000
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Blueberry edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Husky Chair, see pg. 204.
3-2-1 Desk group
Understanding the Needs of Cooperative Learning Environments.
The distinctive shape of the 3-2-1 Desk allows the desks to be
arranged to fit the day's lesson plan. For a lecture or testing, 3-2-1
Desks can be lined up in rows; for group work, the desks can be
arranged in partial and full circles. All of these configurations
encourage students to participate and ultimately foster cooperative
learning.
Choose the 3-2-1 Desk for Pre-K through grade 2
• Durable desktop that measures 1 1 /4"
thick with a high-pressure laminate
surface that resists damage.
• Tough, 3 /8" thick edge molding.
• Rugged powdercoat surface on legs
resists wear.
• Chrome-plated lower legs of 14-gauge
steel resist scuffing.
• Sock-style glide caps add protection.
• 1" adjustable leveling glides provide
stability on uneven floors.
• Adjustable desk height in 1" increments.
206 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

The
3-2-1 Desk
is so versatile,
two students
can sit at
one in three
different ways:
on the
rounded side,
along the
straight edges,
or facing.
3-2-1 Desk
Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
Model Size Wt.
3-2-1 Desk
Adapted for Pre-K though grade 2 cooperative learning classrooms.
03000QS 29 1 /2"d x 40"w x 21-30"h 55 lbs.
03001QS 29 1 /2"d x 40"w x 15-24"h 53 lbs.
(For Models 03000 & 03001 use 13 1 /2" chairs or smaller.)
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
3-2-1 Student Desk protected by patents pending.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
207

CIRCUSLINE
TABLES & CHAIRS
Trapezoid Activity Table
Shown in Fusion Maple top with Navy edge and
Navy frame. Shown with optional Circusline
Chairs, Model 02002.
Half Moon Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top
with Persian Blue edge and
Persian Blue frame. Shown
with optional Circusline
Chairs, Model 02002.
Colorful Early Childhood Chair.
The vibrant colors of Circusline Chairs make this line a
natural for Early Childhood classrooms. The chairs are
designed to withstand years of enthusiastic use. The
durable polypropylene shells have an ergonomic shape
that helps the student keep proper posture. The strong
legs are made to match the shells both in color and
durability thanks to their durable powdercoat finish.
Circusline Stack Chair
Model 02002
Shown in Persian Blue.
208 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Circusline Stacking Chairs
02002QS powdercoat legs 13 1 /2" 6 lbs.
02003QS powdercoat legs 11 1 /2" 5 lbs.
02004QS powdercoat legs 9 1 /2" 5 lbs.
02012QS powdercoat legs 7 1 /2" 5 lbs.

Rectangle Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Navy edge and Navy frame.
Shown with optional Circusline Chairs, Model 02012.
Kidney Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Yellow edge and Yellow frame.
Shown with optional Circusline Chairs, Model 02002.
Top Size 15-24"h 11-16"h Wt.
Rectangle Activity Tables
24"d x 36"w 01004QS 01005QS 42 lbs.
24"d x 48"w 01014QS 01015QS 52 lbs.
24"d x 60"w 01914QS 01915QS 62 lbs.
30"d x 48"w 01024QS 01025QS 62 lbs.
30"d x 60"w 01034QS 01035QS 75 lbs.
30"d x 72"w 01044QS 01045QS 94 lbs.
36"d x 48"w 01924QS 01925QS 73 lbs.
36"d x 60"w 01054QS 01055QS 87 lbs.
36"d x 72"w 01064QS 01065QS 102 lbs.
Round Activity Tables
42" dia. 01094QS 01095QS 60 lbs.
48" dia. 01104QS 01105QS 75 lbs.
60" dia. 01884QS 01885QS 112 lbs.
Trapezoid Activity Tables
30"x 30"x 30"x 60" 01134QS 01135QS 57 lbs.
Square Activity Tables
36"d x 36"w 01074QS 01075QS 57 lbs.
48"d x 48"w 01084QS 01085QS 92 lbs.
Kidney Activity Tables
48"d x 72"w 01144QS 01145QS 116 lbs.
Half Moon Activity Tables
36" x 72" 01154QS 01155QS 90 lbs.
Horseshoe Activity Tables
60"d x 66"w 01934QS 01935QS 130 lbs.
Flower Activity Tables
60" dia. 01214QS 01215QS 104 lbs.
Clover Activity Tables
48" dia. 01204QS 01205QS 70 lbs.
Leg Sets for Activity Tables
adjustable height 01181QS 01184QS 10 lbs.
Clover Activity Table
Shown in Forest Green top with Forest
Green edge and Forest Green frame.
Horseshoe Activity Table
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge
and Red frame.
Circusline Chair
Color Choices
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
Forest GreenQS
NavyQS
Persian BlueQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
YellowQS
quick
ship
CHAIRS Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
TABLES Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Activity Table
Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Forest Green
FRAME Forest Green
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Persian Blue
FRAME Persian Blue
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Purple
FRAME Purple
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Red
FRAME Red
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Yellow
FRAME Yellow
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
209

BRILLIANT
CHAIR
13 1 /2"h Mint
Model 11867
11 1 /2"h Purple
Model 11868
The Brilliant Chair
stacks neatly.
9 1 /2"h Forest Green
Model 11869
Brilliant Chair
Color Choices
Stackable Early Childhood Chair.
The Brilliant Chair is a brilliant choice for Early Childhood
rooms for a number of reasons. First, it's made of tough ABS
plastic to stand up to energetic youth. Next, its 16-gauge
steel legs and 14-gauge steel backbrace are chrome plated,
giving them added durability in what can be a demanding
environment. Finally, the light texture of the chair surface
resists cracking and staining, and helps settle active children.
• MIG-welded, 14-gauge steel backbrace.
• The light texture chair surface resists cracking and
staining.
• Our legendary outside-hold glides hold stronger, longer.
• Durable 16-gauge steel tubes in X-frame design prevent
rear leg collapse.
Brilliant Stack Chair
Shown in Blueberry.
CHOOSE SHELL COLOR:
BlackQS
BlueberryQS
BurgundyQS
ClementineQS
Forest GreenQS
MintQS
NavyQS
PurpleQS
RedQS
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
40 pieces maximum.
210 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Rectangle Planner Activity Table Model 25520L
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Red edge and Platinum
frame. Shown with optional Caster Pack, Model 17557, and
with optional Brilliant Chairs, Model 11867.
Model Description Seat Height Wt.
Brilliant Stacking Chairs
11867QS chrome legs 13 1 /2" 8 lbs.
11868QS chrome legs 11 1 /2" 8 lbs.
11869QS chrome legs 9 1 /2" 8 lbs.
Model Size Wt.
30" deep Rectangle Planner Activity Tables - in Low Range
25500LQS 30"d x 36"w x 15-24"h 76 lbs.
25510LQS 30"d x 48"w x 15-24"h 90 lbs.
25520LQS 30"d x 60"w x 15-24"h 104 lbs.
25530LQS 30"d x 72"w x 15-24"h 120 lbs.
25540LQS 30"d x 90"w x 15-24"h 137 lbs.
Optional Casters (set of 4, 2 locking)
17557QS 3" casters/stem pack 68 lbs.
With optional casters table height adjusts 18 3 /4"-21 3 /4"h
Glide base option for
Brilliant Stack Chair
All glides are outside hold
with swivel base and
chrome plated steel cover.
Nylon base is standard.
Optional are steel base
and felt base.
Steel base glides
Model 17558
set of 4
Felt base glides
Model 17559
set of 4
This is a factory installed
option not available for
field installation.
Glide option must be on
original chair order.
Planner Activity Table
Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Blueberry
FRAME Platinum
TOP Grey NebulaQS
EDGE Navy
FRAME Navy
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
211

EVERYTHING
CART
Everything Cart Model 21088
Two shelves with six bins.
Shown in Forest Green.
Group, store and move manipulatives of all kinds.
An Early Childhood environment needs more than a repurposed
booktruck for gathering, storing and distributing learning aids.
It needs an Everything Cart, purpose-designed to serve in Early
Childhood rooms. Its two levels of double-face bins can hold almost
anything, from books to art supplies, from gym equipment to student
work. More important, it can save the instructor countless steps during
the day, and help organize activities and lessons.
• Baked-on powdercoat finish provides lasting color.
• 18-gauge welded steel construction.
• 4" dual-wheel casters with soft tread for quiet, smooth-rolling operation.
BOOKTRUCK
FREIGHT
S
P
E
C
A
I
L
212 smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Booktruck
Color Choices
Everything Cart Model 21088
Shown in Apple.
Booktruck Top Model 21109
Shown mounted on Everything Cart.
Shown in Grey Nebula top/Apple Edge with
Platinum Brackets.
Apple
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
ChampagneQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
NavyQS
Persian Blue
Platinum
Purple
Red
SandQS
Yellow
Booktruck Top
Color Choices
CHOOSE TOP COLOR
Fusion Maple, Golden
Oak, Grey Nebula or
Wild Cherry
Model Size Wt.
Everything Cart
21088QS 18"d x 36"w x 36"h 70 lbs.
Big Book Truck
21077QS 18"d x 36"w x 36"h 70 lbs.
Booktruck Top* - shelf with handles
21109QS 18"d x 38"w x 3 /4"h 35 lbs.
Big Book Truck Model 21077
Tilting Shelf and five dividers. Shown in Red.
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR
Black, Blueberry,
Burgundy, Champagne,
Clementine, Forest
Green, Mint, Navy,
Platinum, Purple,
Red or Yellow
Brackets for Booktruck
Top are Platinum.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
5 pieces maximum.
*Specify top and edge color. From the top of the handle to the
bottom of the shelf is 6".
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
213

They transport anything from maracas,
tambourines and claves to markers, tempera
paint and clay. They make organizing visual aids
and other classroom tools easy. They can provide
portable temporary storage in classrooms. They
make working and learning easier for everyone in
the school. You might even use them for carting
books around.
Because booktrucks fulfill so many duties,
we’ve taken great steps to offer the widest
range of booktrucks. Flat shelf, sloping shelf, a
combination of bins and shelves – you name the
item to be moved and we’ll have several models
that can do that job and more. We offer such a
broad spectrum of colors, you can color code your
booktrucks, or choose them in school colors.
BOOKTRUCK
FREIGHT
S
P
E
C
A
I
L
214

BOOKTRUCKS
215

SLOPING SHELF
BOOKTRUCK
Three Sloping Shelf Truck Model 21092
Shown in Champagne.
Three Sloping Shelf Truck
Model 21096
Shown in Mint.
Sloping Shelf Models.
These booktrucks are a hardy companion in
the library or classroom, carrying up to 400
lbs. of books, paper and projects. They move
easily through aisles on 4" soft-tread,
dual-wheel casters that won't shimmy like
single-wheel casters.
FREIGHT
S
BOOKTRUCK
P
E
C
I
L
A
• Choose from single- or double-sided
configurations.
• Baked-on powdercoat finish provides
lasting color.
• Double-sided models have sloping shelves
that are 34" long x 7 1 /2" deep on each
side and a 6" high back.
• 18-gauge steel, welded construction.
Optional Divider
Shown in Black.
216
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Two Sloping Shelf Truck Model 21110
Shown in Red.
Six Sloping Shelf Truck Model 21001
Shown in Blueberry. Shown with
optional Dividers, Model 21104.
Booktruck
Color Choices
Apple
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
ChampagneQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Four Sloping Shelf Truck Model 21011
Shown in Persian Blue
Book Truck Top Model 21109
Shown in Pewter Mesh top/Persian Blue edge
with Platinum Brackets.
Four Sloping, Bottom
Flat Shelf Truck
Model 21021
Shown in Clementine.
Four Sloping,
Top Flat Shelf Truck
Model 21031
Shown in Forest Green.
NavyQS
Persian Blue
Platinum
Purple
Red
SandQS
Yellow
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
5 pieces maximum.
Model Size Sides Wt.
Six Sloping Shelf Truck
21001QS 18"d x 36"w x 43"h two-sided 73 lbs.
Three Sloping Shelf Truck
21092QS 14"d x 36"w x 43"h one-sided 60 lbs.
Three Sloping Shelf Truck - now available to ship via UPS
21096QS 14"d x 24"w x 43"h one-sided 46 lbs.
Two Sloping Shelf Truck - now available to ship via UPS
21110QS 14"d x 28"w x 32.5"h one-sided 40 lbs.
Booktruck Top* - shelf with pole supports
(For 36"w Smith System Booktrucks)
21109QS 18"d x 38"w x 3 /4"h 35 lbs.
*Specify top and edge color.
From the top of the handle to the bottom of the shelf is 6".
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Model Size Sides Wt.
Four Sloping Shelf Truck
21011QS 18"d x 36"w x 36"h two-sided 54 lbs.
Four Sloping, Bottom Flat Shelf Truck
21021QS 18"d x 36"w x 43"h two-sided 71 lbs.
Four Sloping, Top Flat Shelf Truck
21031QS 18"d x 36"w x 43"h two-sided 71 lbs.
Divider for Model 21001 & 21031
21104QS 7"d x 6"h three pack 2 lbs.
Divider for Models 21092 & 21096
21105QS 10"d x 6"h three pack 2 lbs.
Choose Divider Color: Black or Smoke
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
217

FLAT SHELF
BOOKTRUCK
Two Flat Shelf Truck Model 21091
Shown in Fuchsia.
Booktruck Top Model 21109
Shown in Golden Oak top/Fuchsia edge with Platinum
Brackets.
Flat Shelf Models.
Our booktrucks with flat shelves are ideal for bulkier books or
library items. They also have the strong welded construction that
can carry 400 lbs. of books and other materials.
• Baked-on powdercoat finish provides lasting color.
• 4" dual-wheel casters with soft tread for quiet, smooth rolling
operation.
Two Flat Shelf Truck Model 21091
Shown in Navy.
218
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

24"h
Three Flat Shelf Truck Model 21100
Shown in Burgundy.
Three Flat Shelf Truck Model 21051
Shown in Mint.
Model Size Wt.
Three Flat Shelf Truck
21051QS 18"d x 36"w x 43"h 62 lbs.
21100QS 18"d x 42"w x 43"h 84 lbs.
Two Flat Shelf Truck
21091QS 18"d x 36"w x 36"h 42 lbs.
Personal Book Cart
21085QS 14"d x 22"w x 24"h 23 lbs.
Personal Book Cart Model 21085
2" caster. Shown in Platinum.
Other color choices: Black or Champagne
Order you choice of casters
for Flat Shelf Booktrucks, Sloping Shelf Booktrucks,
Everything and Anything Carts.
4" Dual-wheel Casters
4 pack. Soft thread.
no-locking wheels
17560QS
2-locking wheels
17565QS
5" Dual-wheel Casters
4 pack. Soft thread.
no-locking wheels
17566QS
2-locking wheels
17567QS
5" Single-wheel Casters
4 pack. Rubber wheel.
no-locking wheels
17568QS
2-locking wheels
17569QS
Booktruck
Color Choices
Apple
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
ChampagneQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
NavyQS
Persian Blue
Platinum
Purple
Red
SandQS
Yellow
Booktruck Top
Color Choices
CHOOSE TOP COLOR
Fusion Maple, Golden
Oak, Grey Nebula or
Wild Cherry
CHOOSE EDGE COLOR
Black, Blueberry,
Burgundy, Champagne,
Clementine, Forest
Green, Mint, Navy,
Platinum, Purple,
Red or Yellow
Brackets for Booktruck
Top are Platinum.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
5 pieces maximum.
Booktruck Top* - shelf with pole supports
(for 36"w Smith System Booktrucks)
21109QS 18"d x 38"w x 3 /4"h 35 lbs.
*Specify top and edge color.
From the top of the handle to the bottom of the shelf is 6".
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
BOOKTRUCK
FREIGHT
S
P
E
C
A
I
L
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
219

EVERYTHING CART
& ANYTHING TRUCK
Booktruck Top Model 21109
Shown mounted on Everything Cart.
Shown in Grey Nebula top/Apple
Edge with Platinum Brackets.
See page 219 for additional color
choices.
Everything Cart Model 21088
Two shelves with six bins.
Shown in Apple.
Mobility for Libraries and Classrooms.
The Everything Cart is designed for maximum durability and
utility. Two levels of double-face bins can hold almost anything —
from books to art supplies, gym equipment and student work.
220
Anything that can’t go into the six roomy double-face bins on
top, surely can go on the two flat shelves below. What’s more,
the Anything Truck is tough, built to stand up to the punishment
that goes with being so useful.
• Baked-on powdercoat finish provides lasting color.
• Helps save time collecting materials.
• 18-gauge welded steel construction.
• 4" dual wheel casters with soft tread for quiet, smooth rolling
operation.
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Anything Truck Model 21089
Two flat shelves and one top shelf
with six bins. Shown in Clementine.

16 colors to choose from
Apple
QSBlack
Blueberry
Burgundy
Booktruck
Color Choices
Apple
QSChampagne
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
ChampagneQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Mint
QSNavy
Persian Blue
Platinum
NavyQS
Persian Blue
Platinum
Purple
Red
SandQS
Yellow
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
5 pieces maximum.
Purple
Red
QSSand
Yellow
Model Size Wt.
Everything Cart
21088QS 18"d x 36"w x 36"h 70 lbs.
Anything Truck
21089QS 18"d x 36"w x 43"h 72 lbs.
Big Book Truck
21077QS 18"d x 36"w x 36"h 70 lbs.
Booktruck Top* - shelf with pole supports
(for 36"w Smith System Booktrucks)
21109QS 18"d x 38"w x 3 /4"h 35 lbs.
*Specify top and edge color.
From the top of the handle to the bottom of the shelf is 6".
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Big Book Truck Model 21077
Tilting Shelf and five dividers. Shown in Red.
BOOKTRUCK
FREIGHT
S
P
E
C
A
I
L
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
221

GORILLA
CART
Four Sloping Shelves and
One Flat Base Shelf Model 21102
Six Sloping Shelves Model 21101
Shown in Red.
Shown in Forest Green.
A Hardy Booktruck that Hauls it All.
The Gorilla Truck is loaded with solid features and offers a dynamic
color selection! Teachers, school administrators and librarians are all
won over by the Gorilla Cart's multi-functionality and super strength.
• 600-lb. capacity.
• Fixed middle casters make it easy for the truck to pivot on an axis
—great for getting over thresholds.
• 5" dual wheel casters with soft tread for quiet, smooth rolling
operation.
Three Flat Shelves Model 21103
Shown in Navy.
FREIGHT
S
BOOKTRUCK
P
E
C
I
L
A
222
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

{Unique teeter-totter motion}
Slightly lower center wheels create
a teeter-totter motion that guides
the Gorilla Cart smoothly over
thresholds and uneven thresholds.
{Spinning action}
Because the Gorilla Cart spins on the
center wheels, accessing both sides in
narrow aisles is a breeze.
16 colors to choose from
Apple
Black
Blueberry
Burgundy
Gorilla Cart
Color Choices
Champagne
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Apple
BlackQS
Blueberry
Burgundy
ChampagneQS
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Mint
Navy
Persian Blue
Platinum
NavyQS
Persian Blue
Platinum
Purple
Red
SandQS
Yellow
Purple
Red Sand Yellow
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
5 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt.
Gorilla Cart w/ six Sloping Shelves
21101QS 18"d x 36"w x 44"h 89 lbs.
Gorilla Cart w/ four Sloping Shelves and one Flat Base Shelf
21102QS 18"d x 36"w x 44"h 84 lbs.
Optional Divider
Shown in Black.
Gorilla Cart w/ three Flat Shelves
21103QS 18"d x 36"w x 44"h 78 lbs.
Divider for Models 21101 & 21102
21104QS 7"d x 6"h, three pack 2 lbs.
Choose Color: Black or Smoke
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
223

Smith System offers turnkey library solutions.
If this gives you a feeling of great relief, you’ve
experienced one of the important benefits of our
capability. A second closely associated benefit is
simplified shopping; you can find everything you
need to outfit the library (except the media) in
this catalog. For a third, consider that choosing all
the library’s furnishings from a single source takes
the guesswork, approximations and compromises
out of matching colors and finishes.
Smith System libraries are designed to make even
the smallest patrons comfortable and welcome.
That’s why our libraries don’t have tall circulation
desks that could intimidate the smallest users.
By attention to details like these, we help make
the library an inviting and favorite destination for
students of all ages.
224

LIBRARY
225

LIBRARY
by DesignU
This library design makes efficient use of the floor space by running single-face shelving the length of the room,
flanking double-face shelving forming islands in the middle.
The remaining space can be saved for expansion or be used with tables or chairs for reading or study.
To create alternate floor plans using this furniture visit DesignU at SmithSystem.com
72"h SINGLE-FACE SHELVING
Efficient, flexible storage for a
variety of media.
72"h DOUBLE-FACE SHELVING
Flexible, efficient storage.
48"h DOUBLE-FACE SHELVING
Flexible, efficient storage.
226
CORNER CIRCULATION DESK
With excellent working space, it
helps anchor the room.
BRILLIANT
ADJUSTABLE CHAIR
Offering comfort, stability
and mobility.

LIBRARY CLASSROOM itemized
model quantity description
22734 2 72"h Single-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) shelves: 1 flat base, 4 adj. dividers
22744 24 72"h Single-Face Shelf - Adder (Charcoal) (Charcoal) shelves: 1 flat base, 4 adj. dividers
23652 4 72"h Single-Face End Panels (Wild Cherry)
23415 4 End Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
23411 22 Intermediate Top (Wild Cherry)
22234 2 72"h Double-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat bases, 8 adj. dividers
22244 2 72"h Double-Face Shelf - Adder (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat bases, 8 adj. dividers
23557 4 72"h Double-Face End Panels (Wild Cherry)
23407 2 Double Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
22131 1 48"h Double-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat bases, 4 adj. periodical
22141 2 48"h Double-Face Adder (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat bases, 4 adj. periodical
23527 2 48"h Double-Face End Panel (Wild Cherry)
23405 2 End Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
23408 1 Intermediate Top (Wild Cherry)
22134 1 48"h Double-Face Shelf - Starter (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat bases, 4 adj. dividers
22144 2 48"h Double-Face Shelf - Adder (Charcoal) shelves: 2 flat bases, 4 adj. dividers
23527 2 48"h Double-Face End Panel (Wild Cherry)
23405 2 End Unit Top (Wild Cherry)
23408 1 Intermediate Top (Wild Cherry)
26672 1 Corner Circulation Desk (Wild Cherry/Black/Black)
11811 1 Brilliant Adjustable Chair (Burgundy)
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
227

CIRCULATION
STATION
Rectangular Workstation Model 26669F
and Model 26667F (with optional Book
Drop Slot, Model 17345)
Shown in New Age Oak top with Champagne
edge and Champagne frame. Shown with
optional UXL Chair, see pg. 36. Optional Book
Drop Truck, Model 21005.
Circulation Desks Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Circulation Desks.
Same photo as above, but viewed from
teacher’s perspective.
Designed Especially for Elementary School Libraries.
Our elementary school library desk offers elementary school students a
comfortable height for checking out and returning books. It offers the
library staff a wide range of functionality because it can be customized
with a number of options, from casters to transaction shelves to CPU
holders. Finally, it offers librarians and architects many design options
because its different shapes can be combined in a number of ways.
228
• Sturdy 1 1 /4" desktop with a high-pressure laminate surface above
and durable backing sheet below.
• Rugged powdercoat finish protects the legs and steel surface.
• Cable tray and port holes in the modesty panel keep wires neatly
organized.
• Strong 10" deep double-wall legs are 18-gauge steel with radius
corners.
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
Book Drop Truck Model 21005
Shown in Platinum, also available in Black
or Champagne

Corner Workstation Model 26672
Peninsula Workstations Model 26670
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge
and Champagne frame. Shown with optional
Library Chairs, see pg. 237. Optional Drawer
Pedestal, see pg. 184.
Peninsula Workstations Model 26670
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Library Chair,
see pg. 237.
Model Size Wt.
Rectangular Workstation
26667 30"d x 36"w x 29-36"h 128 lbs.
26668 30"d x 48"w x 29-36"h 140 lbs.
26669 30"d x 60"w x 29-36"h 155 lbs.
26675 30"d x 72"w x 29-36"h 188 lbs.
Optional Book Drop Slot
(Located approx. 8" off edge, factory installed.)
17345 3"d x 17"w
Corner Workstation Model 26672
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne
edge and Champagne frame.
Peninsula Workstation - choice #2 not available
26670 36"d x 72"w x 29-36"h 186 lbs.
26676 36"d x 60"w x 29-36"h 165 lbs.
Contour Information Desk - choice #2 not available
26671 36"d x 72"w x 29-36"h 158 lbs.
26677 36"d x 60"w x 29-36"h 169 lbs.
Bullet Workstation - choice #2 not available
26673 30"d x 60"w x 29-36"h 145 lbs.
26674 30"d x 72"w x 29-36"h 177 lbs.
Corner Workstation 5 sided - choice #2 not available
26672 30"d x 48"w x 29-36"h 208 lbs.
30" x 60" Rectangle Workstation Model 26669
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Library Chair,
see pg. 237.
Book Drop Truck
21005 22"d x 29"w x 26.75"h 79 lbs.
Optional accessories
Corner Riser Shelves - Available in Platinum. 3 Legs balance shelf
on work surface. Clamps provided to secure shelf.
17469 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 80 lbs.
Riser Shelf - 12"d shelf rests on work surface. Clamps provided to
secure shelf.
17648 12"d x 48"w x 12"h 50 lbs.
17649 12"d x 60"w x 12"h 56 lbs.
17657 12"d x 72"w x 12"h 78 lbs.
Drawer Pedestals
19172 File/File 50 lbs.
19173 Box/Box/File 50 lbs.
Dual-Wheel Caster Packs
17553 3" - set of 4, 2 locking 2 lbs.
17554 4" - set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
Circulation Station
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion Maple
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Golden Oak
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
TOP Wild Cherry
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Contour Information Desk Model 26671
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Champagne
edge and Champagne frame. Shown with
optional Library Chair, see pg. 236.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
229

CARRELS
Carrel Starter Model 26682H
Shown in New Age Oak top with Blueberry edge
and Platinum frame. Shown with optional UXL
Nest & Fold Chair, see pg. 44.
Designer Library Carrel System.
Modular for unlimited expandability, our library carrel is available
in finishes that match existing offerings in our library furniture line.
The work surface can be set at 28" high to serve as a desk/workstation
or at 36" high to serve as a kiosk for patron usage (panels are pre-drilled
for both heights). It can support a computer and features cutouts to
accommodate computer wiring.
• Top and end panels surrounded by 3 /8" thick bumper edge stapled in
place every eight inches.
• 1 1 /4" thick end panels and work surface with high-pressure laminate.
• Overall height 48".
• 18-gauge steel back panel.
Carrel Starter Model 26680
Shown in Amber Cherry top with Chocolate edge
and Platinum frame. Shown with optional UXL
Adjustable Chair, see pg. 39.
230
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Carrel Starter Model 26682
Shown in Golden Oak top with
Champagne edge and frame.
Carrel Starter Model 26684
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge
and frame. Shown with optional Intuit Adjustable
Chair, see pg. 33.
Library Carrel
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion Maple
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Golden Oak
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Carrel Starter Model 26682
Carrel Adder Model 26683
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chairs, see pg. 33.
Back-side of Carrel
Starter, Model 26682
TOP Wild Cherry
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Model Size Wt.
Choose 28"h or 36"h surface height
Carrel Starter
26680 27"d x 24"w x 48"h 105 lbs.
Carrel Adder
26681 27"d x 24"w x 48"h 68 lbs.
Carrel Starter
26682 27"d x 36"w x 48"h 126 lbs.
Carrel Adder
26683 27"d x 36"w x 48"h 85 lbs.
Carrels Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Carrels.
Carrel Starter
26684 27"d x 48"w x 48"h 135 lbs.
Carrel Adder
26685 27"d x 48"w x 48"h 98 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
231

REFERENCE
STAND & KIOSK
Reference Stand Model 26690
Shown in Golden Oak top and end panels with
Champagne edge and frame with optional casters,
Model 17553.
Holds Oversized Books and Reference Materials.
Our Reference Stand provides an ideal place for perusing unabridged
dictionaries, atlases and other large reference materials. Its size and
substantial construction also lend a sense of importance to the media
being reviewed. The work surface is sloped to help the patron view
the material. Three strong, flat shelves hold additional materials.
Our Reference Stand is available in finishes that match the other
members of our library furniture line.
• 1 1 /4" thick end panels and work surface with high-pressure
laminate.
• 18-gauge steel back panel.
Kiosk Model 26680
Shown in Amber Cherry panels,
Chocolate edge, and Platinum frame.
232
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Our Library Kiosk comes in three widths —
(24", 36" and 48") and three finishes (Fusion Maple,
Golden Oak, and Wild Cherry) that match existing
offerings in our library furniture line. Its robust work
surface can easily support a computer and offers
cutouts to accommodate computer wiring. The work
surface can be set at 36"h for patron convenience.
Shown with optional 60" high
Double-sided Library Shelf, see
pg. 242-243.
Library Reference
Stand & Kiosk
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion Maple
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Golden Oak
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Reference Stand Model 26690
Shown in Golden Oak top and end panels
with Champagne edge and frame.
Kiosk Model 26680
Shown in Golden Oak laminate with
Champagne edge and frame.
TOP Wild Cherry
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
Model Size Wt.
Reference Stand
26690 27"d x 36"w x 48"h 155 lbs.
Kiosk
26680 27"d x 24"w x 48"h 105 lbs.
3" Dual-Wheel Caster Pack
17553 set of 4, 2 locking 3 lbs.
Reference Stand & Kiosk Have Top and Edge Choices*
Choice 1 - 1 1 /4" top with Bumper T-Mold no letter to follow Model No.
Choice 2 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm Edge F to follow Model No.
Choice 3 - 1 1 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold H to follow Model No.
Choice 4 - 3 /4" top with 3mm Edge not available
Choice 5 - 3 /4" top with 3mm T-Mold not available
Choice 6 - 3 /4" top with Bullet T-Mold not available
See pages 250-251 for illustration of optional Tops and Edges.
*Choice 1 is standard on Reference Stand & Kiosk.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
233

READING
TABLE
Rectangle Reading Table Model 25700
Shown in Golden Oak top with Charcoal edge and Champagne
frame. Shown with optional Intuit Chairs, see pg. 33.
Heavy Reading? Not too Heavy for This.
Like the hero in many novels, our Library Table is both strong and
handsome. It boasts a 400-lb. load capacity, thanks to its 1 1 /4" thick
work surface supported by an exceptional framework. Starting with
1 1 /4" square 14-gauge legs welded to a cross support of 1" x 2"
14-gauge tubing with 11-gauge steel mounting plate and attached to
a 2" x 3" center support channel of 14-gauge steel, the Library Table
is designed to resist sagging.
234
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Rectangle Reading Table Model 25590
Shown in Golden Oak top with Champagne edge and
Champagne frame. Shown with optional Library Chairs,
see pg. 237.
Round Reading Table Model 25630
Shown in Grey Nebula top with Platinum edge and
Platinum frame. Shown with optional Library Chairs,
see pg. 237.
Library Reading Table
Popular Color Choices
TOP Fusion MapleQS
EDGE Platinum
FRAME Platinum
TOP Golden OakQS
EDGE Champagne
FRAME Champagne
Square Reading Table Model 25610
Shown in Wild Cherry top with Black edge and Black
frame. Shown with optional Library Chairs, see pg. 237.
24", 30" and 36" deep models have one center support
channel that is 2" x 3" wide 14-gauge steel, with
11-gauge steel endplates for maximum stability.
42" and 48" deep models have two center supports.
TOP Wild CherryQS
EDGE Black
FRAME Black
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Model Size Wt.
30"d Rectangle Planner Reading Table
• • 25500QS 30"d x 36"w x 24-34"h 76 lbs.
• • 25510QS 30"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 90 lbs.
• • 25520QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 104 lbs.
• • 25530QS 30"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 120 lbs.
• • 25540QS 30"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 137 lbs.
36"d Rectangle Planner Reading Table
25550QS 36"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 102 lbs.
25560QS 36"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 118 lbs.
25570QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 135 lbs.
25580QS 36"d x 90"w x 24-34"h 158 lbs.
42"d Rectangle Reading Table
25700QS 42”d x 60”w x 24-34”h 143 lbs.
25710QS 42”d x 72”w x 24-34”h 163 lbs.
25590QS 42”d x 90”w x 24-34”h 195 lbs.
48"d Rectangle Reading Table
25610QS 48”d x 48”w x 24-34”h 133 lbs.
25720QS 48”d x 60”w x 24-34”h 159 lbs.
25730QS 48”d x 72”w x 24-34”h 181 lbs.
25740QS 48”d x 90”w x 24-34”h 215 lbs.
Optional Casters (set of 4, 2 locking)
17557QS 3" casters/stem pack 68 lbs.
• •
Model Size Wt.
Square Planner Reading Table
25610QS 48"d x 48"w x 24-34"h 133 lbs.
Round Planner Reading Table
25620QS 42" diameter x 24-34"h 86 lbs.
25630QS 48" diameter x 24-34"h 98 lbs.
25640QS 60" diameter x 24-34"h 148 lbs.
Trapezoid Planner Reading Table
25600QS 30"d x 60"w x 24-34"h 90 lbs.
Half Moon Planner Reading Table
25650QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 102 lbs.
Contour Planner Reading Table
25660QS 36"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 128 lbs.
Kidney Planner Reading Table
25665QS 48"d x 72"w x 24-34"h 149 lbs.
Green • = Low range available in 15-24"h.
Add an L following model number.
Blue • = Fixed-height leg available in 29.5"h.
Add an X following model number.
Available in Black only.
Standard lead time.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
235

LIBRARY
SEATING
Choose from Cherry, Oak or Maple wood grain finish seat and back.
Choose from Champagne, Black or Platinum frame.
Complements Library Tables, Shelving and Furnishings.
The wood grain surface of our library seating perfectly complements
the finishes on our full line of library furniture and furnishings, allowing
a fully integrated design scheme. More than a handsome appearance,
our library seating offers the practicality of a smooth surface that's
easy to clean and resists scratches, gouges and stains. The solid
plastic in the seat and back is non-burning and meets California
fire-code CAL TB133.
• Durable powdercoat frame available in
Black, Platinum or Champagne.
• Backbrace constructed of 14-gauge
steel, MIG-welded for strength.
• Legendary outside hold glides. Built to
stand up to years of tough use without
letting go. Glides feature a nylon base
to prevent staining floors.
• Beefy 16-gauge, steel tubes with
powdercoat frame make the legs more
durable.
236
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

LIBRARY STACK CHAIR
Stacks four high to save space;
when turned upside down will
rest on table top for easy floor
cleaning. Chair available in
17 1 /2" and 15 1 /2" heights.
LIBRARY ADJUSTABLE CHAIR
Adjustable height frame features
5" travel pneumatic lift — from
15 1 /2" to 20 1 /2"h. Swivel seat and
fixed back. Seat plate is 11-gauge
steel welded to backbrace of
14-gauge steel. Black 25" diameter
five-point nylon base available
with your choice of 2" dual-wheel
casters or bell glides.
LIBRARY ADJUSTABLE STOOL
Adjustable height frame features
10" travel pneumatic lift — from
21 1 /2" to 31 1 /2"h. Swivel seat and
fixed back. Seat plate is 11-gauge
steel welded to backbrace of
14-gauge steel. Chrome adjustable
foot ring. Black 25" diameter
five-point nylon base available
with your choice of 2" dual-wheel
casters or bell glides.
Library Stack Chair
Model 02600
Shown in Oak back and seat
with Champagne frame.
Library Adjustable Chair
Model 02791
Shown in Maple back and seat.
with Black frame. Standard
Black adjustable 5-star base.
Library Adjustable Stool
Model 02797
Shown in Cherry back and seat
with Black frame. Standard Black
adjustable 5-star base and Chrome
foot ring.
Model Size Wt.
Library Stacking Chairs
02600 17.5"h 18 lbs.
02601 15.5"h 16 lbs.
Library Adjustable Chair — 2" soft tread casters
02791 15 - 20"h 27 lbs.
Bell glides
02792 15 - 20"h 27 lbs.
Library Adjustable Stool — 2” soft tread casters
02796 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2"h 35 lbs.
Bell glides
02797 21 1 /2 - 31 1 /2"h 35 lbs.
Library Chair
Color Choices
SEAT/BACK Oak
Cherry
Maple
FRAME
Champagne
Black
Platinum
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
237

LIBRARY
ORDER GUIDE
It's easy to develop an effective library
layout with Smith System Shelving.
DesignU, our online library design tool,
allows you to plan your library without
pencils, erasers or graph paper. Visit
DesignU at smithsystem.com. For FREE
ASSISTANCE, call 1-800-328-1061.
Or follow the steps below:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Determine shelving needs: wall units or
islands? See pages 240-241 for Single-Face
wall units; and pages 242-243 Double-Face
island units.
Decide row length: 3', 6', 9' or 12'
(3' sections). Begin with a 3' Starter for each
row and use 3' Adders to complete row.
Choose height: 48", 60", 72", 84" and 90".
Choose shelf type: Flat shelf 11" deep
with 2" high backstop. Divider Shelf 11" deep
with 4" high backstop and five 6"h x 9"d
dividers. Periodical Shelf 11" hinged tilting
display shelf and 11" deep flat shelf. (for
Custom Shelving, see pages 244-243)
Choose frame and shelf color:
Charcoal or Sand.
Choose Top and End Panels if
required: Be sure to use appropriate
Single-Face or Double-Face Top and End
Panels. See examples on facing page.
Choose color: Fusion Maple, Golden Oak or
Wild Cherry. and edge color if ordering
Radius End Panels (see facing page).
ADDER UNIT
Single Face
35 5 /8"w x 13 1 /2"d
STARTER UNIT
Single Face
36 7 /8"w x 13 1 /2"d
FRAME ASSEMBLY
• Tough powdercoat
finish.
• Strong 15-gauge steel
tubular frame
SHELVING ASSEMBLY
• Adjustable cantilever
steel shelves
Base Shelf
238
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

End Panels
Select Standard or Radius if required.
Single-Face End Panels
Standard End Panels
Model Height
23622 48"
23632 60"
23652 72"
23672 84"
Radius End Panels
Model Height
23310 48"
23314 60"
23316 72"
23318 84"
Standard
end panels
Single Face
Radius
end panels
Single Face
Double-Face End Panels
Standard End Panels
Model Height
23527 48"
23537 60"
23557 72"
23577 84"
Radius End Panels
Model Height
23311 48"
23315 60"
23317 72"
23319 84"
End panels are finished both sides and add to overall width, 3 /4" on each end.
42" and 90" high end panels available. Call 1-800-328-1061 to inquire.
tops
Single-Face tops
Model TOP TYPE SIZE
23413 Single unit 36 1 /2"w
23411 Intermediate 35 1 /2"w
23415 End unit 36 1 /4"w
23417 Double unit 72 1 /2"w
Double-Face tops
Model TOP TYPE SIZE
23403 Single unit 36 1 /2"w
23408 Intermediate 35 1 /2"w
23405 End unit 36"w
23407 Double unit 72"w
Tops are finished both sides and add to overall height by 3 /4".
Standard
end panels
Double
Face
Choose laminate color: Fusion Maple,
Golden Oak or Wild Cherry.
Radius
end panels
Double
Face
Choose laminate color: Fusion Maple,
Golden Oak or Wild Cherry and then
choose edge color: Apple, Black,
Blueberry, Burgundy, Champagne,
Chocolate, Clementine, Forest Green,
Fuchsia, Mint, Navy, Persian Blue,
Platinum, Purple, Red, White, Yellow.
Which top for your shelving range?
For 3' wide shelving row For 6' long shelving row
- use single unit top
- use double unit top
(SF #23413 DF #23403)
(SF #23417 DF #23407)
For 9' long shelving row
- use 2 end unit tops (SF #23415 DF #23405)
and one Intermediate top (SF #23411 DF #23408)
Single and Double Face Specifications
Modular Starter / Addon
system provides
versatility in designing
current and future
requirements.
Frame consists of
column with welded foot
bolted together with
horizontal supports.
Column is 1 3 /16" wide x
2 1 /2" deep 16-gauge steel
tube available in heights
of 48", 60", 72", 84" or
90". Columns have one
row of slots on 1" centers
with indent marks for
aligning shelves. Tabs on
shelf brackets hook into
column slots. Columns
shall be spaced 35 1 /2" on
center with horizontal
supports at top and
bottom.
Foot is 14-gauge steel
tube 1 3 /16" wide x 2" high
x 13 1 /2" deep single face
or 24 1 /2" deep double
face.
Horizontal supports are
18-gauge steel tube 3 /4"
deep x 1 3 /4" high x 34"
wide. Columns 72" and
taller will have 3
horizontal supports.
Horizontal supports are
attached with two
connectors at each end.
Wood Laminate Exterior:
Tops and end panels
13 /16" thick wood grain
high pressure laminate
surface finish on both
sides of core. 3mm
wood grain edge.
Optional Radius Top End
Panels: 1" thick with
3 /8" bumper edge.
Adjustable Shelves: All
shelves adjust in height
in 1" increments. Shelf
capacity is 40 pounds
per linear foot.
Shelf brackets are
14-gauge steel 6" high x
9" or 11" deep. Stamped
steel brackets have
integral tabs to hook into
column slots. Shelf
brackets are coined for
round smooth edges.
Shelves are constructed
of 18-gauge steel.
Standard shelves have 1"
'C' shaped flange on
front and 2" return at
rear.
Flat shelf with 2"
backstop in 11" actual
depth. Shelf to accept
hook on solid book
support.
Custom shelving
available in widths of 24"
and 30". Custom height
columns available if
required.
239

LIBRARY
SINGLE-FACE SHELVING
For Lining Walls with
Rows of Storage.
Nothing works harder for your library
than Smith System shelving. The
long-lasting wood laminate exterior
complements any room décor and
stands up to years of use. The tabs
on the shelves hook into column slots
on the frame for quick adjustment,
an inch at a time, even when shelves
are loaded with materials.
Use Single-Face units along outside
walls or to line a room with rows of
reading materials. The Starter/Adder
system makes it easy to build the
exact system you need… just begin
with a 3' Starter and use 3' Adders
to create the desired row length.
Library Single-Face
Color Choices
FRAME Charcoal
or Sand
48"h Starter
with Flat Shelves
Model 22638
Shown in Sand frame and
shelves. With Top, Model 23413.
Shown in Fusion Maple. and
two Radius End Panels, Model
23310. Shown in Fusion Maple
laminate and Clementine edge.
Shown with optional Book
Support, Model 21107.
60"h Starter
with Flat Shelves
Model 22658
Shown in Charcoal frame and
shelves. With Top, Model 23413
and two Standard End Panels,
Model 23632.
Shown in Wild Cherry/Charcoal
Metal
Book
Support
MODEL 04576
72"h Starter
with Flat Shelves
Model 22738
Shown in Charcoal frame
and shelves. With Top,
Model 23413 and two
Standard End Panels,
Model 23652.
Shown in Fusion Maple/
Charcoal.
Hook-on
Book Support
for 2" backstop
11"d x 6"h
Color: Smoke
MODEL 21107
Label Holder
MODEL 21108
With this chart, it is easy to order packaged Frame/Shelf combinations,
just add End Panels and Tops for a complete library look, see pg. 239.
48"h
with base shelf
and 2 adjustable
shelves
11" Flat Shelf 11" Periodical Shelf 11" Divider Shelf
Model Model Model
Starter 22638 22631 22634
Adder 22648 22641 22644
60"h
with base shelf
and 3 adjustable
shelves
Starter 22658 22651 22654
Adder 22668 22661 22664
72"h
with base shelf
and 4 adjustable
shelves
Starter 22738 22731 22734
Adder 22748 22741 22744
84"h
with base shelf
and 5 adjustable
shelves
Starter 22818 22811 22814
Adder 22828 22821 22824
240
Starters are 36 7 /8"w x 13 1 /2"d. Adders are 35 5 /8"w x 13 1 /2"d.
Single face units 60"h and above must be attached to wall.
42" and 90"h single-face shelving available. Call 1-800-328-1061 to inquire.
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com

LIBRARY LAYOUT
USING DESIGNU
PERIMETER Library Layout
When the library’s walls are
uninterrupted with windows, Smith
System Single-Face Library shelving
can help maximize the display and
storage space, while creating an
environment that feels expansive.
With our online design tool, DesignU
at smithsystem.com, you can
experiment with designs until you
find the one that makes best use
of the space.
241

LIBRARY
DOUBLE-FACE SHELVING
Ideal for Islands or
Rows of Storage.
Nothing works harder for your library
than Smith System shelving. The
long-lasting wood laminate exterior
complements any room décor and
stands up to years of use. The tabs on
the shelves hook into column slots on
the frame for quick adjustment, an
inch at a time, even when shelves are
loaded with materials.
Use Double-Face units to create island
ranges of reading materials. The
Starter/Adder system makes it easy to
build the exact system you need… just
begin with a 3' Starter and use 3'
Adders to create the desired row
length.
Library Double-Face
Color Choices
FRAME Charcoal
or Sand
48"h Starter
Model 22138
with 48"h Adder
Model 22148
With 12 Flat shelves. Shown in
Sand with optional Book Support,
Model 21107.
With Top, Model 23407
and two Radius End Panels,
Model 23311.
Shown in Fusion Maple laminate
with Purple edge.
60"h Starter
with Flat Shelves
Model 22158
Shown in Sand.
With Top, Model 23403
and two Radius End Panels,
Model 23315.
Shown in Golden Oak
laminate with Platinum edge.
Shown with optional Book
Support, Model 21107.
Metal Book
Support
MODEL 04576
With this chart, it is easy to order packaged Frame/Shelf combinations,
just add End Panels and Tops for a complete library look, see pg. 239.
72"h Starter
with periodical
shelves
Model 22231
Shown in Charcoal
With Top, Model 23403
and two Standard End
Panels, Model 23557.
Shown in Wild Cherry.
Hook-on
Book Support
for 2" backstop
11"d x 6"h
Color: Smoke
MODEL 21107
Label Holder
MODEL 21108
48"h
with 2 base
shelves and 4
adjustable shelves
11" Flat Shelf 11" Periodical Shelf 11" Divider Shelf
Model Model Model
Starter 22138 22131 22134
Adder 22148 22141 22144
60"h
with 2 base
shelves and 6
adjustable shelves
Starter 22158 22151 22154
Adder 22168 22161 22164
72"h
with 2 base
shelves and 8
adjustable
shelves
Starter 22238 22231 22234
Adder 22248 22241 22244
84"h
with 2 base
shelves and 10
adjustable shelves
Starter 22318 22311 22314
Adder 22328 22321 22324
Starters are 36 7 /8"w x 24 1 /2"d. Adders are 35 5 /8"w x 24 1 /2"d.
42" and 90"h double-face shelving available. Call 1-800-328-1061 to inquire.
242
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com

LIBRARY LAYOUT
USING DESIGNU
Centralized Library Layout
Double-Face Library Shelving from
Smith System affords the designer a
space-efficient solution for libraries
lacking wall space. This solution was
created using our exclusive online
design tool, DesignU, found at
smithsystem.com. There you can
create your own library designs,
using elements from the Smith
System catalog. Visit DesignU to
create your optimized library.
243

LIBRARY
CUSTOM SHELVING
1
Single-Face Frames
Model Height Type
22613 48" Starter
22623 48" Adder
22653 60" Starter
22663 60" Adder
22733 72" Starter
22743 72" Adder
22813 84" Starter
22823 84" Adder
If closed base shelf desired order one for each frame.
23933 11"d
2
Frame
Easy as...
Begin with
a 3' Starter
for each row
Choose height — 48", 60", 72" and 84". 42" and 90"h shelving available.
Call 1-800-328-1061 to inquire.
Determine shelving needs; wall units (Single-Face) or islands (Double-Face).
Determine quantity of frames in Starters and Adders — Decide row length
in 3' sections: 3', 6', 9' or 12'.
Choose color: Sand or Charcoal.
Double-Face Frames
Model Height Type
22113 48" Starter
22123 48" Adder
22153 60" Starter
22163 60" Adder
22233 72" Starter
22243 72" Adder
22313 84" Starter
22323 84" Adder
If closed base shelf desired order two for each frame.
23933 11"d
Use 3' Adders
to complete row
Mobile Frames
Double-Face with 4" casters
24 1 /2"d x 37"w
46"h single unit
Fits three shelves per side,
total six shelves.
Wt. 38 lbs.
Model 21232
64"h single unit
Fits four shelves per side,
total eight shelves.
Wt. 40 lbs.
Model 21236
Flat Shelf w/Integral
Backstop
Available in 12" nominal depths.
2"h backstop.
MODEL 23993 11" shelf
Wt. 13 lbs.
MODEL 23933 11" base shelf
Wt. 14 lbs.
Hook-on Book Support
for 2" backstop
11"d x 6"h
Color: Smoke
MODEL 21107
Label Holder
MODEL 21108
Metal Book
Support
MODEL 04576
Divided Shelf
12" nominal depth with 4"h
backstop. Shelves are slotted
on 1" centers for dividers.
Standard with five dividers per
shelf. 6"h dividers available.
Shelf w/6"h dividers
MODEL 23990
Wt. 13 lbs.
Base Shelf w/6"h dividers
MODEL 23936
Wt. 15 lbs.
Periodical Display and
Storage Shelves
Consists of sloping display
shelf and flat shelf for back
issue storage. 11"d hinged
display shelf rests at 45º
angle and lifts to expose
11"d storage shelf.
MODEL 04560
Wt. 9 lbs.
MODEL 23946
Wt. 12 lbs.
Display Shelf
Storage Shelf
Browser Bins
3 bin browser
MODEL 21498
10"d x 34"w x 8"h
Wt. 20 lbs.
DVD shelves 2 pack
MODEL 21491
12"d x 36"w
Wt. 18 lbs.
244
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

2 Shelves
Choose shelf type — Order frame/shelf
combinations for Flat Shelf, Divider Shelf
and Periodical Shelf.
See pages 239-240 for Single-Face and
pages 242-243 for Double-Face.
Or, create your own Custom Shelving by
ordering shelves shown below in
combination.
Choose color: Sand or Charcoal.
SHELVING
ASSEMBLY
• Adjustable
cantilever
steel shelves
Closed Base Shelf
2
4
1
3
3
End Panels
Select Square or Radius if required. See pg. 239 for images
Single-Face End Panels
Square End Panels
Model Height
23622 48"
23632 60"
23652 72"
23672 84"
Double-Face End Panels
Square End Panels
Model Height
23527 48"
23537 60"
23557 72"
23577 84"
Radius End Panels
Model Height
23310 48"
23314 60"
23316 72"
23318 84"
Radius End Panels
Model Height
23311 48"
23315 60"
23317 72"
23319 84"
End panels are finished both sides and add to overall width, 3 /4" on each end.
42" and 90" high end panels available. Call 1-800-328-1061 to inquire.
4 Tops
Color Choice: Fusion Maple, Wild Cherry or Golden Oak.
Single-Face Tops
Model Top Type Size
23413 Single unit 36 1 /2"w
23411 Intermediate 35 1 /2"w
23415 End unit 36 1 /4"w
23417 Double unit 72 1 /2"w
Double-Face Tops
Model Top Type Size
23403 Single unit 36 1 /2"w
23408 Intermediate 35 1 /2"w
23405 End unit 36"w
23407 Double unit 72"w
Tops are finished both sides and add to overall height by 3 /4".
Media Tray and Sloped Shelf
Consists of 45º sloped shelf with
removable media storage tray.
Tray has six adjustable dividers
to separate media into rows.
Tray accommodates audio
tapes, video tapes, etc.
MODEL 04582
Wt. 11 lbs.
MODEL 04560
Wt. 9 lbs.
Media Tray
Display Shelf
Media Browser Shelf
Accommodates CDs, video
tapes, paperbacks, etc.
11"d x 5"h tub is sloped front
and rear to accommodate
browsing. Shelf has five
adjustable dividers to
separate media into rows.
MODEL 21494
10"d x 34"w x 5"h
Wt. 20 lbs.
Periodical Display Shelf
Fixed slope shelf is 1 1 /4"d x
9 1 /2"h with 1"h retaining rim.
MODEL 21244
Wt. 10 lbs.
Media Bag Shelf
Features 36 knockouts to
hold hook-on bags for multimedia
courseware. Adjusts
to hold bags* of all heights
and up to 12"d x 35"w.
MODEL 23966
Wt. 10 lbs.
*Note: We do not sell bags.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-253.
245

DISPLAY
STANDS
Nomad Magazine Display Model 21678
Shown in Sand frame with Sand shelves. Radius End
Panels shown in Fusion Maple with Purple edge and
Maple top. For additional End Panel and top color
choices, see page 239.
For High Visibility and Easy Access.
Magazine Display Stands and Cases feature adjustable
shelves on sturdy steel frames for high visibility and
easy access to materials
Six-Shelf Nomad Magazine Display
Model 21369
Slanted display shelves have retaining rim at
base. Shown in Wild Cherry End Panels and
top with Charcoal frame.
Model Size Wt.
Six-Shelf Nomad Magazine Display
Square End Panels
21369 25"d x 38"w x 47"h 194 lbs.
6' long Nomad Magazine Display
Radius End Panels
21678 25"d x 74"w x 51"h 310 lbs.
Shown in Golden Oak/Sand.
Shown in Wild Cherry
top and end panels
with Charcoal frame
and shelves.
Model Size Wt.
Three-Shelf 43"h — Square End Panels
20916 43"h 123 lbs.
Four-Shelf 61"h — Square End Panels
20919 61"h 160 lbs.
Literature Magazine Display Case
Slanted display shelves have retaining rim
at base.
Color Choice:
Golden Oak Panels and Top with Sand frame,
Wild Cherry Panels and Top with Charcoal frame,
Fusion Maple Panels and Top with Charcoal frame
or Fusion Maple Panels and Top with Sand frame.
246
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Literature Display Stand
Cantilever frames are 13"d x 37"w.
Choose 42"h with three shelves or
60"h with four shelves.
Color Choices: SandQS or CharcoalQS
Shown in Charcoal.
Shown in Sand
Model Size Wt.
Three-Shelf 42"h
20915QS 42"h 57 lbs.
Four-Shelf 61"h
20918QS 60"h 74 lbs.
Mobile Literature Display
Mobile Display offered in 46"h with six shelves (three
each side) or 64"h with eight shelves (four each side).
Mobile frames are 25"d x 37"w with 4" casters.
Color Choices: SandQS or CharcoalQS
Model Size Wt.
Six-Shelf 46"h
21233QS 46"h 104 lbs.
Eight-Shelf 64"h
21737QS 64"h 116 lbs.
Shown in Charcoal.
quick ship
Ship in 5 days.
20 pieces maximum.
Shown in Sand
Order Guide: Display Stands
To order: specify model numbers and color choices:
Frame: Sand or Charcoal
End Panels: See pg. 239 for color options
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
247

NOMADS
Model Size Wt.
Nomad with 6 Shelves — Radius End Panels.
21677 25"d x 38"w x 51"h 216 lbs.
6-foot-long Nomad — Radius End Panels
8 Magazine and 4 DVD Shelf Display
21678 25"d x 74"w x 51"h 310 lbs.
Nomad with 12 Flat Shelves
21679 25"d x 74"w x 51"h 326 lbs.
6' long Nomad Model 21678
Now available with distinctive new Radius End Panels, our
6' Nomad is practically a library on wheels. Featuring eight
magazine shelves, four DVD shelves and six 4" dual-wheel
casters, it offers both great capacity and mobility. Shown in
New Age Oak top and Radius End Panels with Clementine
edge and Charcoal frame.
Nomad Radius
End Panels/Tops
Color Choices
PANEL Fusion Maple
Golden Oak
Wild Cherry
248
Library-Essential, Large-Volume Carts.
Whatever materials you need to move, Nomads
can handle the job. These large-volume carts
carry heavy loads throughout the school and
provide access from both sides of the cart. You
can depend on these carts for years to come.
• Multi-shelf or browser bin styles.
• Each model features 4" dual, wheel casters,
two of them locking.
Shown with
optional Book
Support, Model
21107. See page
244 to order.
Nomad Model 21677
Now available with distinctive new Radius End
Panels, this Nomad has six generous shelves. It
rolls smoothly on its big casters, making it much
more than a shelf on wheels. Shown in Maple
top, Fusion Maple Radius End Panels with Purple
edge and Sand frame.
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061
EDGE
Apple
Black
Blueberry
Burgundy
Champagne
Chocolate
Clementine
Forest Green
Fuchsia
Mint
Navy
Persian Blue
Platinum
Purple
Red
White
Yellow
FRAME Charcoal
Sand

Multi-Shelf Nomad Model 21684
Top shelf is a mini browser bin, the 10"d middle shelf slants to
accommodate standard books, and the flat shelf on the bottom
can hold large books and supplies. Shelf height adjusts in
one-inch increments. Shown in Golden Oak Panels and top,
Sand frame.
Browser Bin Nomad Model 21683
Four large browser bins 10"d x 34"w x 8"h with
two fixed dividers to keep materials in place.
Shown in Fusion Maple Panels and top, Sand
frame.
Sidewinder High Density Multi-Media Storage Model 21640
For high visibility and easy access to materials, Sidewinder shelves are
great for paperbacks, CDs, DVDs, videos, etc. with hook-on supports that
hold media in place. Tipped spines and sloped shelf make scanning for
titles easy, and the patented design reduces neck strain when searching
through stacks. 6"d sloped shelves have 4"h back. Multi-media shelves
adjust in 1"h increments on sturdy welded steel tube frame. Shown in
Fusion Maple Panels and top, Sand frame.
Model Size Wt.
Multi-Shelf Nomad
21684 25"d x 38"w x 47"h 196 lbs.
Browser Bin Nomad
21683 25"d x 38"w x 47"h 180 lbs.
8-Shelf Nomad Sidewinder Storage
21640 25"d x 38"w x 47"h 224 lbs.
Flat Shelf Nomad Model 21676
Fusion Maple Panels and top, Charcoal frame.
Nomad Square
End Panels/Tops
Color Choices
TOP
Wild Cherry
Golden Oak
Fusion Maple
FRAME Charcoal
Sand
6-Shelf Flat Shelf Nomad
21676 25"d x 38"w x 47"h 192 lbs.
For color samples and custom colors, please turn to pages 252-255.
For a PDF of the specifications,
visit smithsystem.com
249

TOP AND EDGE
CHOICES
Now available in two thicknesses, Smith System tabletops and desktops give choices upon choices.
First, choose the thickness of the Top, either 1 1 /4" or 3 ⁄4". Next, choose the edge treatment. With the 1 1 /4" Top, choose a
3mm Edge for a clean, architectural look, or choose a Bumper T-Mold for durability and its relaxed profile. With the 3 ⁄4"
Top, choose a 3mm Edge, or a Bullet T-Mold for durability and a gentle profile.
CHOICE 1
Bumper
T-Mold
3mm Edge
3mm T-Mold
F
CHOICE 2
3mm Edge
Bullet T-Mold
H
CHOICE 3
3mm T-Mold
Planner Desk shown with 1 1 /4" Top
and Bumper T-Mold
When choosing the edge for a rectangular table, specify the 3mm Edge if you want a crisp 90-degree angled corner. If
you want a rounded corner, specify either the 3mm T-Mold or the Bumper T-Mold (for the 1 1 /4" Top) or Bullet T-Mold
(for the 3 ⁄4" Top).
If you are choosing the edge for a table that isn’t rectangular,
choose either the 3mm T-Mold, or either the Bumper T-Mold
(for 1 1 /4" Tops) or the Bullet T-Mold (for 3 ⁄4" Tops).
E
CHOICE 4
3mm Edge
G
V
CHOICE 5
CHOICE 6
3mm T-Mold
Bullet T-Mold
UXL Desk shown with 3 ⁄4" Top
and Bullet T-Mold Edge
250
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

F
1 1 /4" Top
3mm Edge
H
1 1 /4" Top
3mm T-Mold
1 1 /4" Top
Bumper T-Mold
G
3 /4" Top
3mm T-Mold
V
3 /4" Top
Bullet T-Mold
E
3 /4" Top
3mm Edge
Tops, Edges,T-Molds,
Bumper T-Molds and Bullet T-Molds
251

SMITH SYSTEM FURNITURE Color Combinations & Custom Laminates
It’s easy to create your own color choice on tables.
Step 1:
Choose a Smith System Quick Ship Wilsonart-60 Laminate.
Note: If any other laminate is ordered, a minimum order of 20 tables of Wilsonart-60 is needed to avoid a $300 upcharge.
Extended lead times apply. For any other laminate, call for a price quote.
Other finishes can be done but may result in an up-charge. Call for availability and quotation. Wilsonart laminate: wilsonart.com
Step 2:
Choose any color of edge molding from the 18 we offer.
Step 3:
Refer to the product page number and choose the standard frame colors available for the product line.
Plastic Shell Colors
Apple
Black Blueberry Burgundy Clementine Forest Green Fuchsia
Mint Navy Persian Blue Purple Red White Yellow
Laminate Colors
Amber Cherry
Blond Echo
Fusion Maple
Golden Oak
Grey Mesh
Grey Nebula New Age Oak Pewter Mesh Tan Echo
Wild Cherry
Note: Custom color tables are not cancelable after materials have been ordered and are not returnable. Library jobs must be
quoted if using special laminate.
Quick Ship colors ship in 5 business days. For chairs a quantity of 40, for tables a quantity of 20. Designer colors require
extended lead times. Delivery date is dependent on order quantity, material availability and date of order. If you require faster
delivery, please call customer service at 1-800-328-1061 and we will make every effort to accommodate your order.
252
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Edge Molding Colors
Apple Blueberry Black Burgundy Champagne Charcoal
Chocolate Clementine Forest Green Fuchsia Mint Navy
Persian Blue Platinum Purple Red White Yellow
Powdercoat Finish Colors - see product page number for available frame colors.
Apple Blueberry Black Burgundy Champagne Charcoal
Chocolate Clementine Forest Green Fuchsia Mint Navy
Persian Blue Platinum Purple Red Sand
Yellow
Hard Plastic Colors
Burgundy Black Cherry Grey
Maple Navy Oak Sand
253

COLOR PALETTE
UXL offers a diverse palette to work with. For added flexibility, different colors can be chosen for the seat
and back in the same chair. Unlike choosing furniture from multiple sources, when you choose UXL, you
don’t have to worry about the colors in the chairs exactly matching the colors in the tables and desks.
Plastic Shell Colors
Apple
Black Blueberry Burgundy Clementine Forest Green Fuchsia
Mint Navy Persian Blue Purple Red White Yellow
Laminate Colors
Amber Cherry
Blond Echo
Fusion Maple
Golden Oak
Grey Mesh
Grey Nebula New Age Oak Pewter Mesh Tan Echo
Wild Cherry
254
smithsystem.com | 800.328.1061

Blueberry
Black
Apple
Burgundy
Yellow
Clementine
Red
Forest Green
Purple
Fuchsia
Persian Blue
Navy
Mint
SEAT FABRIC COLORS
255

Customer Service, Ordering, Terms and Freight
PURCHASE ORDERS
Be sure to include: 1) Quantity, 2) Model Number,
3) Description, 4) Color choice, 5) Price for each item.
We accept orders via fax or mail. All orders are confirmed
with a printed acknowledgment. Please check your
acknowledgment carefully to ensure that your order is
correct.
You may also order online at www.smithsystem.com.
Cancellation or modification of orders must be submitted
to Smith System in writing. In some cases a cancellation
fee may be charged if raw materials, work in progress or
special products are involved.
PRICES
All prices shown are FOB factory; Plano, Texas. Prices are
subject to change without notice. Freight charges for
shipments are prepaid and added to the invoice.
For delivered pricing or delivered and installed pricing,
Smith System produces a price book based on shipping
zone.
TERMS
Invoice terms for credit accounts are NET 30 days. Orders
are invoiced on day of shipment.
Smith System accepts school purchase orders and credit
cards. Credit cards will be charged on day of shipment.
Smith System accepts Visa, MasterCard or American
Express.
SHIPPING LEAD TIMES
Most of our furniture is stocked year-round as part of our
Quick Ship program. Quick Ship items are designated in
the catalog with color and quantity availability. Quick Ship
lead time is 5 business days, though this may extend
during our busy summer season. Non-Quick Ship lead
time is 4 to 6 weeks, though this may extend during
our busy summer season.
Shipping date is confirmed upon receipt of order. Every
attempt will be made to meet that shipping date.
However, it is subject to change without prior notification.
DELIVERY
Shipments are sent prepaid with charges added to the
invoice. Product shipping weights are for product only.
LTL shipments usually are on pallets. Pallet weights will
be added to total weight for LTL shipments. Standard LTL
shipments do not include inside delivery. Inside delivery is
available. Inside delivery requests need to be on the order
and appropriate freight charges will be added. Some
products can ship UPS. For orders that ship UPS, inside
delivery is included in freight charges.
FREIGHT
Do not refuse freight because of damage or shortage.
All merchandise is packed to comply with carrier
requirements. For your protection all shipments should be
carefully inspected by the consignee before acceptance.
The delivering carrier should be requested to record on the
delivery receipt any damage to goods or cartons at time
of delivery. Also, any shortages should be noted on the
delivery receipt. If further damage is found after delivery,
immediate inspection by the delivering carrier must be
requested. The delivering carrier must be notified at once
of concealed damage. All cartons and merchandise must
be held for inspection. Carrier liability ceases after 15 days.
Smith System will assist our customers at all times to
obtain claim settlement, but the consignee must take the
necessary steps to obtain the proof of loss and damages.
NOTE: Carriers are not responsible for damage or shortage
after the delivery receipt is signed without a damage or
shortage notification.
CHARGE BACKS
The tare weights and dimensions listed are estimated;
therefore Smith System will not be responsible for freight
costs associated with these variances.
RETURNS
Merchandise may not be returned without consent from
Smith System customer service. Special order items may
not be returned for credit. All return merchandise is
subject to a 25% re-handling fee. No merchandise is
accepted for return after 90 days from date of invoice.
Smith System reserves the right to
discontinue products and change product
specifications and prices.
256

More flavors of Flavors Seating: P-Tablet Desk, Adjustable Chair and Combo Desk.
NEW FLAVORS SEATING. VANILLA IT’S NOT.
Flavors Seating offers striking design,
bold colors and five-position seating to
help optimize educational environments
of all kinds. Find out more about Flavors
Seating online, or in our new 286-page
catalog. Call today for your free copy:
1.800.328.1061.
SMITHSYSTEM.COM/FLAVORS
Flavors, Smith System and the Smith System “Swirl” Logo in word, stylized
and design forms, are trademarks of Smith System Manufacturing Company.

NEW FOR 2010
Interchange Open Front Rectangle Desk.
See pgs. 72-73.
Flavors Seating. See pgs. 26-29.
Flex Desks. See pgs. 128-131.
Flavors Seating. See pgs. 26-29.
Cascade Mid-Case. See pgs. 196-197.
P.O. Box 860415 Plano, Texas 75086 972.398.4050 Phone 972.398.4051 Fax 800.328.1061 Toll-free www.smithsystem.com
© smithsystem 0110